ld: Add --warn-textrel and obsolete --warn-shared-textrel
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
b3adc24a 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
b8891f8d 24@set CSKY
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
fa1477dc 34@set PDP11
2a60a7a8
AM
35@set POWERPC
36@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 37@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 38@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
39@set SPU
40@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 41@set WIN32
e0001a05 42@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
43@end ifset
44@c man end
45
9160ea82
AM
46@ifnottex
47@dircategory Software development
48@direntry
252b5132 49* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
50@end direntry
51@end ifnottex
252b5132 52
0e9517a9 53@copying
e49e529d
JM
54This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
55@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
56@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
57@end ifset
58version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 59
b3adc24a 60Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 61
cf055d54 62Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 63under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
64or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
65with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
66Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 67section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 68@end copying
252b5132
RH
69@iftex
70@finalout
71@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 72@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 73@titlepage
71ba23f6 74@title The GNU linker
252b5132 75@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
76@subtitle @code{ld}
77@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
78@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
79@end ifset
252b5132
RH
80@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
81@author Steve Chamberlain
82@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
83@page
84
85@tex
86{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
87\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
88\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 89\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
90\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
91}
92\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
93@end tex
94
95@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 96@c man begin COPYRIGHT
b3adc24a 97Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 98
0285c67d 99Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 100under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
101or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 104section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 105@c man end
252b5132 106
252b5132
RH
107@end titlepage
108@end iftex
4ecceb71 109@contents
252b5132
RH
110@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
84ec0e6d 112@ifnottex
252b5132 113@node Top
71ba23f6 114@top LD
e49e529d
JM
115This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118@end ifset
119version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 120
cf055d54 121This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
122Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 124
252b5132
RH
125@menu
126* Overview:: Overview
127* Invocation:: Invocation
128* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129@ifset GENERIC
130* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131@end ifset
132@ifclear GENERIC
133@ifset H8300
134* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
136@ifset Renesas
137* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132 138@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
139@ifset ARM
140* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
141@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
142@ifset M68HC11
143* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
144@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
145@ifset HPPA
146* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
148@ifset M68K
149* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
150@end ifset
833794fc
MR
151@ifset MIPS
152* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
153@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
154@ifset POWERPC
155* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156@end ifset
157@ifset POWERPC64
158* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
160@ifset S/390
161* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
162@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
163@ifset SPU
164* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
165@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
166@ifset TICOFF
167* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
168@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
169@ifset WIN32
170* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
171@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
172@ifset XTENSA
173* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
174@end ifset
252b5132
RH
175@end ifclear
176@ifclear SingleFormat
177* BFD:: BFD
178@end ifclear
179@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
180
181* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
182* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 183* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 184* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 185@end menu
84ec0e6d 186@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
187
188@node Overview
189@chapter Overview
190
191@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
192@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 193
0879a67a 194@ifset man
0285c67d 195@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 196ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
197@c man end
198
199@c man begin SEEALSO
200ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
201the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
202@file{ld}.
203@c man end
204@end ifset
205
206@c man begin DESCRIPTION
207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 209their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 210compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 211
ff5dcc92 212@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
213a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
214to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
215
0285c67d
NC
216@ifset man
217@c For the man only
ece2d90e 218This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
219@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
220language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
221@end ifset
222
252b5132 223@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
224This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
225to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
226write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
227@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
228available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
229@end ifclear
230
231Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
232linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
233execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 234@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
235(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
236
0285c67d
NC
237@c man end
238
252b5132
RH
239@node Invocation
240@chapter Invocation
241
0285c67d
NC
242@c man begin DESCRIPTION
243
ff5dcc92 244The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
245and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
246you have many choices to control its behavior.
247
0285c67d
NC
248@c man end
249
252b5132
RH
250@ifset UsesEnvVars
251@menu
a05a5b64 252* Options:: Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
253* Environment:: Environment Variables
254@end menu
255
256@node Options
a05a5b64 257@section Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
258@end ifset
259
260@cindex command line
261@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
262
263@c man begin OPTIONS
264
252b5132
RH
265The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
266practice few of them are used in any particular context.
267@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 268For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
269object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
270link a file @code{hello.o}:
271
272@smallexample
273ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
274@end smallexample
275
ff5dcc92 276This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
277result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
278the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
279directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
280
ff5dcc92 281Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
282point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
283as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
284which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
285files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
286different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
287occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
288option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
289noted in the descriptions below.
290
291@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
292Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
293together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
294options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
295an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
296
297Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
298specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
299and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
300are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
301message @samp{No input files}.
302
36f63dca 303If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
304assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
305augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
306linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
307permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
308or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
309@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
310script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
311extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
312to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
313the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
314
315For options whose names are a single letter,
316option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
317whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
318option that requires them.
319
320For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 321precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 322@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 323this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 324only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
325@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
326name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
327output.
328
329Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
330option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
331immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
332@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
333Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
334accepted.
252b5132 335
36f63dca 336Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
a05a5b64 337(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
338prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
339compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
340
341@smallexample
2509a395 342 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
343@end smallexample
344
345This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
346silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
347may also arise when passing options that require values through a
348driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
349a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
350and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
351the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
352
353@smallexample
354 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
355@end smallexample
4e53152f 356
a05a5b64 357Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
4e53152f
NC
358linker:
359
ff5dcc92 360@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 361@include at-file.texi
dff70155 362
2509a395
SL
363@kindex -a @var{keyword}
364@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
365This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
366argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
367@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
368@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
369to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
370
7ee314fa
AM
371@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
373Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
374@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
375specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
376will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
377finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 378it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 379This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 380interface.
7ee314fa 381
252b5132
RH
382@ifclear SingleFormat
383@cindex binary input format
384@kindex -b @var{format}
385@kindex --format=@var{format}
386@cindex input format
387@cindex input format
388@item -b @var{input-format}
389@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
390@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
391file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 392@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 393that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 394configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 395to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
396default input format the most usual format on each machine.
397@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
398supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
399formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
400@xref{BFD}.
401
402You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
403binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
404linking object files of different formats), by including
405@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 406particular format.
252b5132
RH
407
408The default format is taken from the environment variable
409@code{GNUTARGET}.
410@ifset UsesEnvVars
411@xref{Environment}.
412@end ifset
413You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
414@code{TARGET};
415@ifclear man
416see @ref{Format Commands}.
417@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
418@end ifclear
419
420@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
421@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
422@cindex compatibility, MRI
423@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
424@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 425For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 426files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
427@ifclear man
428@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
429@end ifclear
430@ifset man
431the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
432@end ifset
433Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 434the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
435scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
436If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
437specified by any @samp{-L} options.
438
439@cindex common allocation
440@kindex -d
441@kindex -dc
442@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 443@item -d
252b5132
RH
444@itemx -dc
445@itemx -dp
446These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
447compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
448even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
449script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
450@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
451
7ee314fa
AM
452@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
453@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
454@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
455@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
456Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
457@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
458specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
459will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
460option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 461The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 462
abf874aa
CL
463@kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions
464@item --enable-non-contiguous-regions
465This option avoids generating an error if an input section does not
466fit a matching output section. The linker tries to allocate the input
467section to subseque nt matching output sections, and generates an
468error only if no output section is large enough. This is useful when
469several non-contiguous memory regions are available and the input
470section does not require a particular one. The order in which input
471sections are evaluated does not change, for instance:
472
473@smallexample
474 MEMORY @{
475 MEM1 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x14
476 MEM2 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x40
477 MEM3 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x2000, LENGTH = 0x40
478 @}
479 SECTIONS @{
480 mem1 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM1
481 mem2 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
482 mem3 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
483 @}
484
485 with input sections:
486 .data.1: size 8
487 .data.2: size 0x10
488 .data.3: size 4
489
490 results in .data.1 affected to mem1, and .data.2 and .data.3
491 affected to mem2, even though .data.3 would fit in mem3.
492@end smallexample
493
494This option is incompatible with INSERT statements because it changes
495the way input sections are mapped to output sections.
496
497@kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
498@item --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
499This option enables warnings when
500@code{--enable-non-contiguous-regions} allows possibly unexpected
501matches in sections mapping, potentially leading to silently
502discarding a section instead of failing because it does not fit any
503output region.
504
252b5132
RH
505@cindex entry point, from command line
506@kindex -e @var{entry}
507@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 508@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
509@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
510Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
511program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
512named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
513and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
514base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
515@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
516and other ways of specifying the entry point.
517
b58f81ae
DJ
518@kindex --exclude-libs
519@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
520Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 521exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
522@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
523automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
524port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
525explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
526option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
527be treated as hidden.
528
e1c37eb5
DK
529@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
530@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
531Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
532should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
533into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
534may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
535used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
536the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
537match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
538command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
539of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
540regardless of this option.
541
252b5132
RH
542@cindex dynamic symbol table
543@kindex -E
544@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 545@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
546@item -E
547@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
548@itemx --no-export-dynamic
549When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
550option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
551all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
552set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
553
554If you do not use either of these options (or use the
555@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
556dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
557referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
558
559If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
560back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
561dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
562linking the program itself.
563
55255dae 564You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 565be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 566See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 567
8b747e1a
DK
568Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
569support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
570the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
571
36f63dca 572@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
573@cindex big-endian objects
574@cindex endianness
575@kindex -EB
576@item -EB
577Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
578
579@cindex little-endian objects
580@kindex -EL
581@item -EL
582Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 583@end ifclear
252b5132 584
2509a395
SL
585@kindex -f @var{name}
586@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
587@item -f @var{name}
588@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
589When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
590to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
591table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
592symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
593
594If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
595run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
596the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
597first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
598@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
599in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
600Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
601implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
a094d01f 602machine-specific performance.
252b5132
RH
603
604This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
605will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
606
2509a395
SL
607@kindex -F @var{name}
608@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 609@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 610@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
611When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
612the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
613of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
614on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
615
616If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
617run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
618dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
619filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
620found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
621used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
622@var{name}.
623
ff5dcc92 624Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 625toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
626object files.
627@ifclear SingleFormat
628The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 629@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 630@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
631environment variable.
632@end ifclear
633The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
634creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 635
3dbf70a2 636@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
637@kindex -fini=@var{name}
638@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
639When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
640executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
641address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
642the function to call.
643
252b5132
RH
644@kindex -g
645@item -g
646Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
647
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -G @var{value}
649@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 650@cindex object size
2509a395 651@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
652@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
653Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
654@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 655MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
656sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
657
658@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 659@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 660@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 661@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
662@itemx -soname=@var{name}
663When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
664the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
665which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
666linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
667field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
668
669@kindex -i
670@cindex incremental link
671@item -i
672Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
673
3dbf70a2 674@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
675@kindex -init=@var{name}
676@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
677When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
678executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
679of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
680function to call.
681
252b5132 682@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 683@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 684@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 685@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
686@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
687Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
688list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
689If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 690will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 691will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 692
ff5dcc92 693On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
694files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
695and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
696called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
697@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
698indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
699to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
700@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
701
702The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
703specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
704was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
705command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
706archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
707the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
708
ff5dcc92 709See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
710archives multiple times.
711
712You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
713
714@ifset GENERIC
715This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 716if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
717behaviour of the AIX linker.
718@end ifset
719
720@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 721@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 722@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 723@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 724@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
725Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
726for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
727option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
728in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
729on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 730@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
731order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
732how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
733option is specified.
252b5132 734
3aa2d05a
NC
735If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
736prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
737@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 738
252b5132
RH
739@ifset UsesEnvVars
740The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 741@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
742some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
743@end ifset
744
745The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
746@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
747at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
748
749@cindex emulation
750@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 751@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
752Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
753emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
754
755If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
756@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
757
758Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
759configured.
760
761@cindex link map
762@kindex -M
763@kindex --print-map
764@item -M
765@itemx --print-map
766Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
767information about the link, including the following:
768
769@itemize @bullet
770@item
3b83e13a 771Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
772@item
773How common symbols are allocated.
774@item
775All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
776which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
777@item
778The values assigned to symbols.
779
780Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
781involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
782have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
783linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
784of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
785the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
786linker script containing:
787
788@smallexample
789 foo = 1
790 foo = foo * 4
791 foo = foo + 8
792@end smallexample
793
794will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
795option is used:
796
797@smallexample
798 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
799 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
800 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
801@end smallexample
802
803See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
804scripts.
d2ef37eb 805
06ddcada
AM
806@item
807How GNU properties are merged.
d2ef37eb 808
06ddcada
AM
809When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
810.note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
811These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
d2ef37eb
L
812
813@smallexample
814Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
815@end smallexample
816
06ddcada 817This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
d2ef37eb
L
818merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
819is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
820
821@smallexample
06ddcada 822Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
d2ef37eb
L
823@end smallexample
824
06ddcada 825This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
d2ef37eb
L
826when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
827is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
252b5132
RH
828@end itemize
829
035801ce
FS
830@cindex link map discarded
831@kindex --print-map-discarded
832@kindex --no-print-map-discarded
833@item --print-map-discarded
834@itemx --no-print-map-discarded
835Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
836in the link map. Enabled by default.
837
252b5132
RH
838@kindex -n
839@cindex read-only text
840@cindex NMAGIC
841@kindex --nmagic
842@item -n
843@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
844Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
845libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
846mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
847
848@kindex -N
849@kindex --omagic
850@cindex read/write from cmd line
851@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 852@item -N
252b5132
RH
853@itemx --omagic
854Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
855not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
856libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
857mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
858is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
859specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
860
861@kindex --no-omagic
862@cindex OMAGIC
863@item --no-omagic
864This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
865sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
866be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
867shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
868
869@kindex -o @var{output}
870@kindex --output=@var{output}
871@cindex naming the output file
872@item -o @var{output}
873@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 874Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
875option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
876script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
877
878@kindex -O @var{level}
879@cindex generating optimized output
880@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 881If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 882the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
883should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
884option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
885the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
886no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
887of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 888
387dd777
DP
889@kindex -plugin @var{name}
890@item -plugin @var{name}
891Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
892the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
893automatically added by the complier, when using link time
894optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
895wish.
896
897Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
898from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
899@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
900those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
41f37a6f 901copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
387dd777 902based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
6c19b93b 903just copy in the newest one.
387dd777 904
26278bb8
UD
905@kindex --push-state
906@cindex push state governing input file handling
907@item --push-state
908The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
909flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
910restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
911
912The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
913@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
914@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
915@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
916@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
917@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
918
919One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
920used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
921listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
922something as follows:
923
924@smallexample
925-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
926@end smallexample
927
928@kindex --pop-state
929@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 930@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
931Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
932flags governing input file handling.
933
a712da20
NC
934@kindex -q
935@kindex --emit-relocs
936@cindex retain relocations in final executable
937@item -q
938@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 939Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
940Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
941order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
942in larger executables.
943
dbab7a7b
NC
944This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
945
4f471f39
RS
946@kindex --force-dynamic
947@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
948@item --force-dynamic
949Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
950to VxWorks targets.
951
252b5132
RH
952@cindex partial link
953@cindex relocatable output
954@kindex -r
1049f94e 955@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 956@item -r
1049f94e 957@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 958Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 959turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
960linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
961magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
962@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 963@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
964If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
965linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
966constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
967
62bf86b4
HPN
968When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
969partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
970relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
971example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
972with input files in other formats at all.
973
252b5132
RH
974This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
975
976@kindex -R @var{file}
977@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
978@cindex symbol-only input
979@item -R @var{filename}
980@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
981Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
982relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
983to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
984programs. You may use this option more than once.
985
ff5dcc92 986For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 987followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 988the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
989
990@kindex -s
991@kindex --strip-all
992@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 993@item -s
252b5132
RH
994@itemx --strip-all
995Omit all symbol information from the output file.
996
997@kindex -S
998@kindex --strip-debug
999@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 1000@item -S
252b5132
RH
1001@itemx --strip-debug
1002Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
1003
a70f34c0
NC
1004@kindex --strip-discarded
1005@kindex --no-strip-discarded
1006@item --strip-discarded
1007@itemx --no-strip-discarded
1008Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
1009Enabled by default.
1010
252b5132
RH
1011@kindex -t
1012@kindex --trace
1013@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 1014@item -t
252b5132 1015@itemx --trace
4f4690cd
AM
1016Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
1017@samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
1018@samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
1019and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
1020a linker bug report.
252b5132
RH
1021
1022@kindex -T @var{script}
1023@kindex --script=@var{script}
1024@cindex script files
1025@item -T @var{scriptfile}
1026@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
1027Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 1028@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 1029@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
1030output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
1031the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
1032specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
1033options accumulate.
252b5132 1034
14be8564
L
1035@kindex -dT @var{script}
1036@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
1037@cindex script files
1038@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
1039@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
1040Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
1041
1042This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1043processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1044command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1045@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1046behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1047command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1048the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1049@samp{gcc}).
1050
252b5132
RH
1051@kindex -u @var{symbol}
1052@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1053@cindex undefined symbol
1054@item -u @var{symbol}
1055@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1056Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1057symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1058modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1059different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1060option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1061
0a618243
AB
1062If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1063into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1064undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1065instead.
1066
1067@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1068@cindex symbols, require defined
1069@cindex defined symbol
1070@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1071Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1072is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1073is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1074and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1075@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1076can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1077
252b5132
RH
1078@kindex -Ur
1079@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1080@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1081For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1082@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1083turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1084@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1085It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1086with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1087be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1088@samp{-r} for the others.
1089
c005eb9e
AB
1090@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1091@cindex orphan sections
1092@cindex sections, orphan
1093@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1094Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1095specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1096
1097@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1098
1099@table @code
1100@item place
1101Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1102the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1103@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1104
1105@item discard
1106All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1107@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1108
1109@item warn
1110The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1111issue a warning.
1112
1113@item error
1114The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1115@end table
1116
1117The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1118
577a0623
AM
1119@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1120@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1121Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1122@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1123missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1124specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1125multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1126input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1127in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1128
252b5132
RH
1129@kindex -v
1130@kindex -V
1131@kindex --version
1132@cindex version
1133@item -v
1134@itemx --version
1135@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1136Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1137lists the supported emulations.
1138
1139@kindex -x
1140@kindex --discard-all
1141@cindex deleting local symbols
1142@item -x
1143@itemx --discard-all
1144Delete all local symbols.
1145
1146@kindex -X
1147@kindex --discard-locals
1148@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1149@item -X
252b5132 1150@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1151Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1152system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1153or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1154
1155@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1156@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1157@cindex symbol tracing
1158@item -y @var{symbol}
1159@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1160Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1161option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1162to prepend an underscore.
1163
1164This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1165don't know where the reference is coming from.
1166
1167@kindex -Y @var{path}
1168@item -Y @var{path}
1169Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1170for Solaris compatibility.
1171
1172@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1173@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1174The recognized keywords are:
1175@table @samp
1176
e6e2dfbd
AM
1177@item bndplt
1178Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1179
1180@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1181@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1182@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1183@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1184Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1185to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1186@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1187@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1188@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1189@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1190Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1191
233a0083
L
1192@item cet-report=none
1193@itemx cet-report=warning
1194@itemx cet-report=error
1195Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1196GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1197section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1198linker not report missing properties in input files.
1199@option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1200missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1201the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1202Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1203GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1204turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1205Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1206
cd6d6c15 1207@item combreloc
e6e2dfbd
AM
1208@itemx nocombreloc
1209Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1210dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
cd6d6c15 1211
b8871f35 1212@item common
e6e2dfbd
AM
1213@itemx nocommon
1214Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1215link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1216
1217@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1218Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1219layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1220using pages of this size.
b8871f35 1221
cd6d6c15 1222@item defs
97a232d7
NC
1223Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1224is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1225This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
cd6d6c15 1226
e6e2dfbd
AM
1227@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1228@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1229Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1230if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1231by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1232@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1233may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1234selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1235these options.
1236
6aa29e7b
JJ
1237@item execstack
1238Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1239
b039ef04
L
1240@item global
1241This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1242the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1243of subsequently loaded libraries.
1244
93ab9c0d
NC
1245@item globalaudit
1246This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1247This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1248setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1249tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
a05a5b64 1250the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
6c19b93b 1251all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
93ab9c0d 1252
e6e2dfbd
AM
1253@item ibtplt
1254Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1255Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1256
8df93cb5 1257@item ibt
e6e2dfbd
AM
1258Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1259to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1260Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1261
cd6d6c15
NC
1262@item initfirst
1263This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1264It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1265before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1266the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1267the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1268objects.
1269
1270@item interpose
e6e2dfbd
AM
1271Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1272so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1273libraries not so marked.
cd6d6c15 1274
5fa222e4
AM
1275@item lazy
1276When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1277dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1278the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1279Lazy binding is the default.
1280
cd6d6c15 1281@item loadfltr
e6e2dfbd 1282Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
cd6d6c15 1283
e6e2dfbd
AM
1284@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1285Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
cd6d6c15 1286
e6e2dfbd
AM
1287@item muldefs
1288Allow multiple definitions.
b8871f35 1289
cd6d6c15 1290@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1291Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1292defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1293
1294@item nodefaultlib
e6e2dfbd
AM
1295Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1296should ignore any default library search paths.
cd6d6c15
NC
1297
1298@item nodelete
e6e2dfbd 1299Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
cd6d6c15
NC
1300
1301@item nodlopen
e6e2dfbd 1302Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
cd6d6c15
NC
1303
1304@item nodump
e6e2dfbd 1305Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
cd6d6c15 1306
6aa29e7b
JJ
1307@item noexecstack
1308Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1309
e6e2dfbd
AM
1310@item noextern-protected-data
1311Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1312library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1313used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1314generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1315module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1316i386 and x86-64.
8dfef1bd 1317
e6e2dfbd
AM
1318@item noreloc-overflow
1319Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1320relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1321overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
6aa29e7b 1322
cd6d6c15
NC
1323@item now
1324When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1325dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
e6e2dfbd
AM
1326when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1327function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1328called.
cd6d6c15
NC
1329
1330@item origin
e6e2dfbd 1331Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
cd6d6c15 1332
6aa29e7b 1333@item relro
e6e2dfbd 1334@itemx norelro
def5c83c
AM
1335Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1336specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1337relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1338than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
e6e2dfbd 1339Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
6aa29e7b 1340
47acac12
L
1341@item separate-code
1342@itemx noseparate-code
1343Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1344specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1345be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1346code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1347
e6e2dfbd
AM
1348@item shstk
1349Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1350to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1351Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
24718e3b 1352
04c3a755 1353@item stack-size=@var{value}
e6e2dfbd 1354Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
04c3a755
NS
1355Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1356@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1357
e6e2dfbd
AM
1358@item text
1359@itemx notext
1360@itemx textoff
a6dbf402
L
1361Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the position-independent
1362or shared object has dynamic relocations in read-only sections. Don't
1363report an error if @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
48580982 1364
97a232d7
NC
1365@item undefs
1366Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1367either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1368This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1369
cd6d6c15
NC
1370@end table
1371
ece2d90e 1372Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1373
1374@kindex -(
1375@cindex groups of archives
1376@item -( @var{archives} -)
1377@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1378The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1379either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1380
1381The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1382references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1383the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1384archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1385object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1386would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
5d3db3e2 1387they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
252b5132
RH
1388resolved.
1389
1390Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1391it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1392more archives.
1393
69da35b5
NC
1394@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1395@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1396@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1397@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1398Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1399recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1400and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1401the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1402behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1403so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1404restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1405
4a43e768
AM
1406@kindex --as-needed
1407@kindex --no-as-needed
1408@item --as-needed
1409@itemx --no-as-needed
1410This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1411on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1412the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1413on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1414needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1415emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1416non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1417the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1418non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1419Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1420the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1421needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1422from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1423
e56f61be
L
1424@kindex --add-needed
1425@kindex --no-add-needed
1426@item --add-needed
1427@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1428These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1429their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1430options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1431and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1432
252b5132
RH
1433@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1434@item -assert @var{keyword}
1435This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1436
1437@kindex -Bdynamic
1438@kindex -dy
1439@kindex -call_shared
1440@item -Bdynamic
1441@itemx -dy
1442@itemx -call_shared
1443Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1444for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1445default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1446for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1447multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1448@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1449
a1ab1d2a
UD
1450@kindex -Bgroup
1451@item -Bgroup
1452Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1453section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1454object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1455@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1456only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1457
252b5132
RH
1458@kindex -Bstatic
1459@kindex -dn
1460@kindex -non_shared
1461@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1462@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1463@itemx -dn
1464@itemx -non_shared
1465@itemx -static
1466Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1467platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1468variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1469may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1470library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1471option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1472option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1473shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1474references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1475libraries.
252b5132
RH
1476
1477@kindex -Bsymbolic
1478@item -Bsymbolic
1479When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1480definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1481for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1914e264
AM
1482within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1483platforms which support shared libraries.
252b5132 1484
40b36307
L
1485@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1486@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1487When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1488symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307 1489This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1914e264 1490libraries.
40b36307 1491
55255dae
L
1492@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1493@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1494Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1495typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1496global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1497within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1498to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1499in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1500which support shared libraries.
1501
1502The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1503scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1504
40b36307
L
1505@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1506@item --dynamic-list-data
1507Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1508
1509@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1510@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1511Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1512is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1513
0b8a70d9
L
1514@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1515@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1516Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1517
252b5132
RH
1518@kindex --check-sections
1519@kindex --no-check-sections
1520@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1521@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1522Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1523been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1524perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1525suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1526allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
a05a5b64 1527restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1528Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1529force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1530option.
252b5132 1531
ddbb8a31
NC
1532@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1533@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1534@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1535@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1536This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1537by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1538command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1539output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1540input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1541specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1542follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1543behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1544
1545This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1546libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1547mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1548their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1549required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1550the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1551dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1552symbols.
1553
252b5132
RH
1554@cindex cross reference table
1555@kindex --cref
1556@item --cref
1557Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1558generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1559Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1560
1561The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1562easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1563sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1564symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1565definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1566where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1567symbol are listed.
252b5132 1568
4818e05f
AM
1569@cindex common allocation
1570@kindex --no-define-common
1571@item --no-define-common
1572This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1573The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1574@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1575
1576The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1577the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1578of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1579forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1580Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1581from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1582This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1583and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1584duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1585paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1586
7bdf4127
AB
1587@cindex group allocation in linker script
1588@cindex section groups
1589@cindex COMDAT
1590@kindex --force-group-allocation
1591@item --force-group-allocation
1592This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1593normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1594default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1595change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1596command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1597effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1598
252b5132 1599@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1600@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1601@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1602Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1603address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1604times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1605limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1606context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1607symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1608constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1609using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1610@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1611equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1612
1613@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1614@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1615@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1616@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1617@itemx --no-demangle
1618These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1619and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1620present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1621underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1622mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1623different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1624to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1625demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1626is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1627
1628@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1629@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1630@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1631@item -I@var{file}
1632@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1633Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1634generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1635linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1636doing.
1637
9b8b325a
RF
1638@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1639@item --no-dynamic-linker
1640When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1641linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1642executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1643entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1644
a70f34c0
NC
1645@kindex --embedded-relocs
1646@item --embedded-relocs
1647This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
a094d01f 1648that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
a70f34c0
NC
1649is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1650targets.
1651
3f0a5f17
ME
1652@kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1653@item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1654Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1655in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1656
7ce691ae 1657@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1658@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1659@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1660@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1661Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1662with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1663
252b5132
RH
1664@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1665@item --force-exe-suffix
1666Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1667
1668If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1669@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1670the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1671option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1672Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1673it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1674
1675@kindex --gc-sections
1676@kindex --no-gc-sections
1677@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1678@item --gc-sections
1679@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1680Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1681targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1682performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1683@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1684collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1685implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1686
d5465ba2
AM
1687@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1688examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1689symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1690command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1691referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1692libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1693referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1694the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
b69e1ff3
CC
1695relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1696@samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
d5465ba2 1697
ac69cbc6 1698This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1699@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
b69e1ff3
CC
1700specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1701@samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1702command in the linker script.
ac69cbc6 1703
c17d87de
NC
1704@kindex --print-gc-sections
1705@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1706@cindex garbage collection
1707@item --print-gc-sections
1708@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1709List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1710printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1711collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1712default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1713be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1714line.
1715
22185505 1716@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1717@cindex garbage collection
1718@item --gc-keep-exported
1719When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1720collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1721default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1722executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1723collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1724Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1725it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1726ELF format targets.
1727
30824704
RM
1728@kindex --print-output-format
1729@cindex output format
1730@item --print-output-format
1731Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1732other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1733in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1734
3604cb1f
TG
1735@kindex --print-memory-usage
1736@cindex memory usage
1737@item --print-memory-usage
1738Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1739the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1740quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1741headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1742parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1743
1744@smallexample
1745Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1746 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1747 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1748@end smallexample
1749
252b5132
RH
1750@cindex help
1751@cindex usage
1752@kindex --help
1753@item --help
1754Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1755
ea20a7da
CC
1756@kindex --target-help
1757@item --target-help
a094d01f 1758Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
ea20a7da 1759
2509a395
SL
1760@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1761@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1762Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1763@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1764
1765@cindex memory usage
1766@kindex --no-keep-memory
1767@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1768@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1769symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1770instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1771necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1772while linking a large executable.
1773
1774@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1775@kindex -z defs
97a232d7 1776@kindex -z undefs
252b5132 1777@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1778@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1779Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1780is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1781The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1782behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1783libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1784
97a232d7
NC
1785The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1786
aa713662
L
1787@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1788@kindex -z muldefs
1789@item --allow-multiple-definition
1790@itemx -z muldefs
1791Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1792report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1793first definition will be used.
1794
b79e8c78 1795@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1796@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1797@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1798@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1799Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1800This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1801determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1802shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1803how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1804
903249d7
NC
1805The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1806referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1807an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1808a shared library.
1809
1810The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1811libraries specified at link time are that:
1812
1813@itemize @bullet
1814@item
1815A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1816that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1817resolvable at load time.
1818@item
1819There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1820symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1821
1822The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1823select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1824architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1825appropriate memset function.
1826@end itemize
b79e8c78 1827
31941635
L
1828@kindex --no-undefined-version
1829@item --no-undefined-version
1830Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1831it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1832will be issued instead.
1833
3e3b46e5
PB
1834@kindex --default-symver
1835@item --default-symver
1836Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1837exported symbols.
1838
1839@kindex --default-imported-symver
1840@item --default-imported-symver
1841Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1842imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1843
252b5132
RH
1844@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1845@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1846Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1847files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1848been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1849This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1850errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1851have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1852inappropriate.
1853
fe7929ce
AM
1854@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1855@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1856Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1857library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1858
252b5132
RH
1859@kindex --no-whole-archive
1860@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1861Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1862archive files.
1863
1864@cindex output file after errors
1865@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1866@item --noinhibit-exec
1867Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1868Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1869errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1870when it issues any error whatsoever.
1871
0a9c1c8e
CD
1872@kindex -nostdlib
1873@item -nostdlib
1874Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1875command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1876(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1877
252b5132 1878@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1879@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1880@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1881@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1882file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1883@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1884object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1885object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1886should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1887usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1888name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1889list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1890command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1891this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1892@end ifclear
1893
76359541
TP
1894@kindex --out-implib
1895@item --out-implib @var{file}
1896Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1897the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1898library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1899may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1900behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1901step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1902the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1903
36af4a4e
JJ
1904@kindex -pie
1905@kindex --pic-executable
1906@item -pie
1907@itemx --pic-executable
1908@cindex position independent executables
1909Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1910ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1911libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1912address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1913normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1914defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1915
252b5132
RH
1916@kindex -qmagic
1917@item -qmagic
1918This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1919
1920@kindex -Qy
1921@item -Qy
1922This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1923
1924@kindex --relax
1925@cindex synthesizing linker
1926@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1927@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1928@item --relax
28d5f677 1929@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1930An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1931@ifset GENERIC
1932This option is only supported on a few targets.
1933@end ifset
1934@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1935@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132 1936@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1937@ifset XTENSA
1938@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1939@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1940@ifset M68HC11
1941@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1942@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1943@ifset NIOSII
1944@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1945@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1946@ifset POWERPC
1947@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1948@end ifset
252b5132 1949
a094d01f 1950On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
28d5f677
NC
1951global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1952addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1953synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1954instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1955
1956On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1957debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1958@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1959This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1960family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1961@end ifset
1962
1963@ifset GENERIC
1964On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1965but ignored.
1966@end ifset
1967
28d5f677
NC
1968On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1969@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1970
252b5132
RH
1971@cindex retaining specified symbols
1972@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1973@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1974@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1975@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1976Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1977discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1978symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1979@ifset GENERIC
1980(such as VxWorks)
1981@end ifset
1982where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1983run-time memory.
1984
1985@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1986or symbols needed for relocations.
1987
1988You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1989line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1990
1991@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1992@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1993@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1994@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1995Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1996linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1997arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
c1b00498
MR
1998them to locate shared objects at runtime.
1999
2000The @option{-rpath} option is also used when locating shared objects which
2001are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
2002description of the @option{-rpath-link} option. Searching @option{-rpath}
2003in this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which
2004have been configured with the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2005
2006If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
2007contents of the environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it
2008is defined.
252b5132 2009
ff5dcc92 2010The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 2011SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
2012@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
2013runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
2014options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
2015gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 2016file systems.
252b5132 2017
ff5dcc92 2018For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 2019followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 2020the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
2021@end ifset
2022
2023@ifset GENERIC
2024@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
2025@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
2026@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
2027When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
2028happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
2029of the input files.
2030
2031When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
2032non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
2033shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 2034explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 2035specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 2036@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
2037either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
2038appearing multiple times.
2039
e680a6b6
NC
2040The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
2041directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
2042containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2043and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
204464-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2045
2046The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2047@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2048supported.
2049
28c309a2
NC
2050This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2051that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2052is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2053runtime linker would do.
2054
252b5132 2055The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 2056libraries:
d8e4137b 2057
252b5132
RH
2058@enumerate
2059@item
ff5dcc92 2060Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 2061@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2062Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2063between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2064specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2065used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
2066at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2067by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2068the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 2069@item
e2a83dd0
NC
2070On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2071@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2072environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 2073@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2074On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2075directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 2076@item
a1b8d843 2077For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 2078variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 2079@item
ec4eb78a
L
2080For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2081@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2082libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2083@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2084@item
252b5132
RH
2085The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2086@item
d8e4137b
NC
2087For a linker for a Linux system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2088exists, the list of directories found in that file. Note: the path
2089to this file is prefixed with the @code{sysroot} value, if that is
2090defined, and then any @code{prefix} string if the linker was
2091configured with the @command{--prefix=<path>} option.
2092@item
2093For a native linker on a FreeBSD system, any directories specified by
2094the @code{_PATH_ELF_HINTS} macro defined in the @file{elf-hints.h}
2095header file.
2096@item
2097Any directories specifed by a @code{SEARCH_DIR} command in the
2098linker script being used.
252b5132
RH
2099@end enumerate
2100
2101If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2102warning and continue with the link.
2103@end ifset
2104
2105@kindex -shared
2106@kindex -Bshareable
2107@item -shared
2108@itemx -Bshareable
2109@cindex shared libraries
2110Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2111and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2112shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2113undefined symbols in the link.
2114
252b5132 2115@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2116@item --sort-common
2117@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2118@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2119This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2120ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2121sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2122eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2123between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2124specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2125
2509a395
SL
2126@kindex --sort-section=name
2127@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2128This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2129patterns in the linker script.
2130
2509a395
SL
2131@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2132@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2133This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2134patterns in the linker script.
2135
a70f34c0
NC
2136@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2137@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2138This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2139.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2140post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2141
252b5132 2142@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2143@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2144Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2145each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2146size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2147
2148@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2149@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2150Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2151output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2152This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2153certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2154cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2155that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2156support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2157input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2158more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2159many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2160
2161@kindex --stats
2162@item --stats
2163Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2164as execution time and memory usage.
2165
2509a395 2166@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2167@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2168Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2169configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2170that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2171
a70f34c0
NC
2172@kindex --task-link
2173@item --task-link
2174This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2175file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2176
252b5132
RH
2177@kindex --traditional-format
2178@cindex traditional format
2179@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2180For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2181the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2182use the traditional format instead.
2183
2184@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2185For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2186symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2187full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2188@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2189trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2190combine duplicate entries.
2191
2509a395
SL
2192@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2193@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2194Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2195address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2196times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2197line.
2198@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2199for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2200@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2201should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2202sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2203
2509a395
SL
2204@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2205@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2206@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2207@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2208@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2209@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2210@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2211Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2212@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2213
2509a395
SL
2214@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2215@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2216@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2217When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2218byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2219
9d5777a3
RM
2220@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2221@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2222@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2223When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2224the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2225text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2226
0d705e9f
AM
2227@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2228@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2229@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2230When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2231model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2232
560e09e9
NC
2233@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2234@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2235Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2236values for @samp{method}:
2237
2238@table @samp
2239@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2240Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2241
2242@item report-all
da8bce14 2243Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2244
2245@item ignore-in-object-files
2246Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2247ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2248
2249@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2250Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2251ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2252when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2253libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2254command line.
2255@end table
2256
2257The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2258by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2259
2260Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2261unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2262can change this to a warning.
2263
1715a13c
L
2264@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2265@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2266@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2267@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2268Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2269supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2270the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2271argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2272
2273@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2274@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2275@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2276Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2277used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2278about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2279is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2280see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2281use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2282symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2283@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2284
7ce691ae 2285@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2286@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2287@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2288@item --warn-common
2289Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2290a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2291but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2292you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2293Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2294warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2295
2296There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2297
2298@table @samp
2299@item int i = 1;
2300A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2301file.
2302
2303@item extern int i;
2304An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2305There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2306variable somewhere.
2307
2308@item int i;
2309A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2310variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2311The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2312single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2313size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2314a definition of the same variable.
2315@end table
2316
2317The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2318Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2319just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2320encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2321a common symbol.
2322
2323@enumerate
2324@item
2325Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2326definition for the symbol.
2327@smallexample
2328@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2329 overridden by definition
2330@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2331@end smallexample
2332
2333@item
2334Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2335the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2336except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2337@smallexample
2338@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2339 overriding common
2340@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2341@end smallexample
2342
2343@item
2344Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2345@smallexample
2346@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2347 of `@var{symbol}'
2348@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2349@end smallexample
2350
2351@item
2352Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2353@smallexample
2354@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2355 overridden by larger common
2356@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2357@end smallexample
2358
2359@item
2360Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2361the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2362encountered in a different order.
2363@smallexample
2364@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2365 overriding smaller common
2366@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2367@end smallexample
2368@end enumerate
2369
2370@kindex --warn-constructors
2371@item --warn-constructors
2372Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2373object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2374detect the use of global constructors.
2375
2376@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2377@item --warn-multiple-gp
2378Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2379This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2380Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2381section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2382of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2383base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2384base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2385bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2386large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2387values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2388option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2389
2390@kindex --warn-once
2391@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2392@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2393@item --warn-once
2394Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2395which refers to it.
2396
2397@kindex --warn-section-align
2398@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2399@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2400@item --warn-section-align
2401Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2402alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2403The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2404is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2405the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2406
a6dbf402
L
2407@kindex --warn-textrel
2408@item --warn-textrel
2409Warn if the linker adds DT_TEXTREL to a position-independent executable
2410or shared object.
8fdd7217 2411
a0c402a5
L
2412@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2413@item --warn-alternate-em
2414Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2415
560e09e9
NC
2416@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2417@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2418If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2419@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2420This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2421
2422@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2423@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2424This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2425it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2426
252b5132
RH
2427@kindex --whole-archive
2428@cindex including an entire archive
2429@item --whole-archive
2430For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2431@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2432in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2433files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2434library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2435library. This option may be used more than once.
2436
7ec229ce 2437Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2438about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2439Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2440list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2441your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2442
2509a395
SL
2443@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2444@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2445Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2446@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2447undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2448@var{symbol}.
2449
2450This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2451wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2452wishes to call the system function, it should call
2453@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2454
2455Here is a trivial example:
2456
2457@smallexample
2458void *
cc2f008e 2459__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2460@{
cc2f008e 2461 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2462 return __real_malloc (c);
2463@}
2464@end smallexample
2465
ff5dcc92 2466If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2467all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2468instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2469call the real @code{malloc} function.
2470
2471You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2472links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2473you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2474file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2475call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2476
4ea904ed
SH
2477Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2478internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2479@code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2480@code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2481
2482@smallexample
2483int
2484f (void)
2485@{
2486 return 123;
2487@}
2488
2489int
2490g (void)
2491@{
2492 return f();
2493@}
2494@end smallexample
2495
6aa29e7b 2496@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2497@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2498@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2499@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2500Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2501(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2502section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2503
e41b3a13
JJ
2504@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2505@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2506Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2507generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2508if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2509
6c1439be
L
2510@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2511@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2512@item --enable-new-dtags
2513@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2514This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2515systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2516@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2517and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2518If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2519created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2520those options are only available for ELF systems.
2521
2d643429 2522@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2523@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2524Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2525close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2526time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2527increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2528value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2529
fdc90cb4
JJ
2530@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2531@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2532Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2533@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2534new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2535the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
c8455dc9
NC
2536hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2537but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
fdc90cb4 2538
0ce398f1
L
2539@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2540@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2541@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2542@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2543@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2544@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2545@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2546@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2547On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2548compressed using zlib.
2549
2550@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2551sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2552DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2553instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2554also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2555sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2556
2557The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2558@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2559
2560Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2561sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2562for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2563uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2564
2565The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2566involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2567default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2568@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2569
35835446
JR
2570@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2571@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2572This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2573linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2574for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2575about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2576
4f9c04f7 2577Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 25781021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2579run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2580has been used.
2581
2582The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2583enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2584
c0065db7
RM
2585@kindex --build-id
2586@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2587@item --build-id
2588@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2589Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2590or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2591unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2592@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2593@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2594@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2595the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2596string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2597@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2598is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2599
2600The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2601that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2602unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2603to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2604file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2605string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2606
2607Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2608@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2609@end table
2610
0285c67d
NC
2611@c man end
2612
36f63dca 2613@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2614
0285c67d
NC
2615@c man begin OPTIONS
2616
ff5dcc92 2617The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2618the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2619normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2620use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2621@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2622like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2623symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2624object file).
2625
2626In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
a05a5b64 2627support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
252b5132
RH
2628PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2629values by either a space or an equals sign.
2630
ff5dcc92 2631@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2632
2633@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2634@item --add-stdcall-alias
2635If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2636as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2637[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2638
2639@kindex --base-file
2640@item --base-file @var{file}
2641Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2642addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2643@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2644[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2645
2646@kindex --dll
2647@item --dll
2648Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2649@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2650file.
bb10df36 2651[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2652
88183869
DK
2653@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2654@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2655@item --enable-long-section-names
2656@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2657The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2658the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2659for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2660fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2661to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2662allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2663disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2664generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2665as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2666with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2667GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2668information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2669option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2670section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2671when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2672image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2673[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2674
252b5132
RH
2675@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2676@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2677@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2678@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2679If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2680do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2681only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2682resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2683undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2684@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2685to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2686warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2687import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2688to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2689feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2690@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2691mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2692[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2693
522f09cd
KT
2694@kindex --leading-underscore
2695@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2696@item --leading-underscore
2697@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2698For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2699in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2700disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2701
252b5132
RH
2702@cindex DLLs, creating
2703@kindex --export-all-symbols
2704@item --export-all-symbols
2705If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2706be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2707otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2708explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2709attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2710option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2711@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2712@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2713exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2714re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2715such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2716@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2717@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2718Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2719not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2720extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2721(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2722These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2723@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2724@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2725@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2726@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2727[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2728
2729@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2730@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2731Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2732exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2733[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2734
2927aaca
NC
2735@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2736@item --exclude-all-symbols
2737Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2738[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2739
252b5132
RH
2740@kindex --file-alignment
2741@item --file-alignment
2742Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2743file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2744512.
bb10df36 2745[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2746
2747@cindex heap size
2748@kindex --heap
2749@item --heap @var{reserve}
2750@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2751Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2752to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2753committed.
bb10df36 2754[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2755
2756@cindex image base
2757@kindex --image-base
2758@item --image-base @var{value}
2759Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2760the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2761is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2762your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2763other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2764for dlls.
bb10df36 2765[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2766
2767@kindex --kill-at
2768@item --kill-at
2769If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2770symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2771[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2772
26d2d8a2
BF
2773@kindex --large-address-aware
2774@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2775If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2776header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2777greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2778or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2779section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2780[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2781
f69a2f97
NC
2782@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2783@item --disable-large-address-aware
2784Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2785This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2786driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2787addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2788[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2789
252b5132
RH
2790@kindex --major-image-version
2791@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2792Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2793[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2794
2795@kindex --major-os-version
2796@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2797Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2798[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2799
2800@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2801@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2802Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2803[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2804
2805@kindex --minor-image-version
2806@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2807Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2808[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2809
2810@kindex --minor-os-version
2811@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2812Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2813[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2814
2815@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2816@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2817Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2818[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2819
2820@cindex DEF files, creating
2821@cindex DLLs, creating
2822@kindex --output-def
2823@item --output-def @var{file}
2824The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2825file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2826(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2827library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2828automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2829[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2830
b044cda1 2831@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2832@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2833@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2834@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2835Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2836@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2837By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2838for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2839execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2840[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2841
2842@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2843@item --disable-auto-image-base
2844Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2845user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2846default.
bb10df36 2847[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2848
2849@cindex DLLs, linking to
2850@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2851@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2852When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2853search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2854@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2855between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2856uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2857@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2858[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2859
2860@kindex --enable-auto-import
2861@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e 2862Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
317ff008
EB
2863DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2864mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2865[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2866
2867The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2868feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2869
2870Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2871of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2872PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
4d8907ac 2873
e2a83dd0
NC
2874Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2875data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2876placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2877around a problem with consts that is described here:
2878http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2879
4d8907ac
DS
2880Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2881see this message:
0d888aac 2882
ece2d90e 2883"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2884documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2885
ece2d90e
NC
2886This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2887ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2888allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2889fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2890constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2891multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2892this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2893of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2894the warning, and exit.
2895
2896There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2897data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2898
2fa9fc65
NC
2899One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2900of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2901this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2902
c0065db7
RM
2903A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2904that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2905there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2906a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2907
2908@example
2909extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2910extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2911 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2912@end example
2913
2914or
2915
2916@example
2917extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2918extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2919 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2920@end example
2921
c0065db7 2922For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2923is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2924
2925@example
2926extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2927extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2928 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2929@end example
2930
c406afaf
NC
2931or
2932
2933@example
2934extern long long extern_ll;
2935extern_ll -->
2936 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2937@end example
2938
2fa9fc65 2939A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2940'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2941@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2942requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2943building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2944merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2945between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2946constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2947
2948Original:
2949@example
2950--foo.h
2951extern int arr[];
2952--foo.c
2953#include "foo.h"
2954void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2955 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2956@}
2957@end example
2958
2959Solution 1:
2960@example
2961--foo.h
2962extern int arr[];
2963--foo.c
2964#include "foo.h"
2965void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2966 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2967 volatile int *parr = arr;
2968 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2969@}
2970@end example
2971
2972Solution 2:
2973@example
2974--foo.h
2975/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2976#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2977 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2978#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2979#else
2980#define FOO_IMPORT
2981#endif
2982extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2983--foo.c
2984#include "foo.h"
2985void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2986 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2987@}
2988@end example
2989
c0065db7 2990A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2991library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2992for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2993functions).
b044cda1
CW
2994
2995@kindex --disable-auto-import
2996@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2997Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2998@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2999[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 3000
2fa9fc65
NC
3001@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3002@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3003If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
3004that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
3005a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 3006environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 3007[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
3008
3009@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3010@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
317ff008 3011Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 3012[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 3013
b044cda1
CW
3014@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
3015@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
3016Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 3017[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 3018
252b5132
RH
3019@kindex --section-alignment
3020@item --section-alignment
3021Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
3022addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 3023[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
3024
3025@cindex stack size
3026@kindex --stack
3027@item --stack @var{reserve}
3028@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 3029Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 3030to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 3031committed.
bb10df36 3032[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
3033
3034@kindex --subsystem
3035@item --subsystem @var{which}
3036@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
3037@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
3038Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
3039legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
3040@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
3041the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
3042@var{which}.
bb10df36 3043[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 3044
2f563b51
DK
3045The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
3046of the PE file header:
3047[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
3048
2d5c3743
NC
3049@kindex --high-entropy-va
3050@item --high-entropy-va
3051Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
3052(ASLR).
dc9bd8c9
HD
3053This option also implies @option{--dynamicbase} and
3054@option{--enable-reloc-section}.
2d5c3743 3055
2f563b51
DK
3056@kindex --dynamicbase
3057@item --dynamicbase
3058The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3059randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3060Vista for i386 PE targets.
dc9bd8c9 3061This option also implies @option{--enable-reloc-section}.
2f563b51
DK
3062
3063@kindex --forceinteg
3064@item --forceinteg
3065Code integrity checks are enforced.
3066
3067@kindex --nxcompat
3068@item --nxcompat
3069The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3070This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3071
3072@kindex --no-isolation
3073@item --no-isolation
3074Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3075
3076@kindex --no-seh
3077@item --no-seh
3078The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3079this image.
3080
3081@kindex --no-bind
3082@item --no-bind
3083Do not bind this image.
3084
3085@kindex --wdmdriver
3086@item --wdmdriver
3087The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 3088
2f563b51
DK
3089@kindex --tsaware
3090@item --tsaware
3091The image is Terminal Server aware.
3092
0cb112f7
CF
3093@kindex --insert-timestamp
3094@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
3095@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3096Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3097as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3098other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 3099will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
3100same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3101can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 3102that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 3103identically.
dc9bd8c9
HD
3104
3105@kindex --enable-reloc-section
3106@item --enable-reloc-section
3107Create the base relocation table, which is necessary if the image
3108is loaded at a different image base than specified in the PE header.
252b5132
RH
3109@end table
3110
0285c67d
NC
3111@c man end
3112
ac145307
BS
3113@ifset C6X
3114@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3115
3116@c man begin OPTIONS
3117
3118The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3119libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3120all executables use an index of 0.
3121
3122@table @gcctabopt
3123
3124@kindex --dsbt-size
3125@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 3126This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
3127or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3128entries.
3129
3130@kindex --dsbt-index
3131@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3132This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3133to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3134executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3135@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3136
fbd9ad90
PB
3137@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3138The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3139exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3140
ac145307
BS
3141@end table
3142
3143@c man end
3144@end ifset
3145
b8891f8d
AJ
3146@ifset CSKY
3147@subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3148
3149@c man begin OPTIONS
3150
3151@table @gcctabopt
3152
3153@kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3154@item --branch-stub
3155This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3156sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3157usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3158can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3159the compiler or assembler.
3160
3161@kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3162@item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3163This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3164It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3165be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3166stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3167sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3168@samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3169linker should choose suitable defaults.
3170
3171@end table
3172
3173@c man end
3174@end ifset
3175
93fd0973
SC
3176@ifset M68HC11
3177@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3178
3179@c man begin OPTIONS
3180
3181The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3182memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3183
3184@table @gcctabopt
3185
3186@kindex --no-trampoline
3187@item --no-trampoline
3188This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3189is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3190instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3191
3192@kindex --bank-window
3193@item --bank-window @var{name}
3194This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3195the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3196The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3197paging and addresses within the memory window.
3198
3199@end table
3200
3201@c man end
3202@end ifset
3203
7fb9f789
NC
3204@ifset M68K
3205@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3206
3207@c man begin OPTIONS
3208
3209The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3210when linking for 68K targets.
3211
3212@table @gcctabopt
3213
3214@kindex --got
3215@item --got=@var{type}
3216This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3217@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3218@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3219Info entry for @file{ld}.
3220
3221@end table
3222
3223@c man end
3224@end ifset
3225
833794fc
MR
3226@ifset MIPS
3227@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3228
3229@c man begin OPTIONS
3230
3231The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3232generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3233linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3234
3235@table @gcctabopt
3236
3237@kindex --insn32
3238@item --insn32
3239@kindex --no-insn32
3240@itemx --no-insn32
3241These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3242generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3243or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
324432-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3245used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3246possible.
3247
8b10b0b3
MR
3248@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3249@item --ignore-branch-isa
3250@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3251@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3252These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3253transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3254accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3255is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3256instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3257equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3258calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3259a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3260an error.
3261
3734320d
MF
3262@kindex --compact-branches
3263@item --compact-branches
3264@kindex --no-compact-branches
fa1477dc 3265@itemx --no-compact-branches
3734320d
MF
3266These options control the generation of compact instructions by the linker
3267in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
3268
833794fc
MR
3269@end table
3270
3271@c man end
3272@end ifset
3273
fa1477dc
SC
3274
3275@ifset PDP11
3276@subsection Options specific to PDP11 targets
3277
3278@c man begin OPTIONS
3279
3280For the pdp11-aout target, three variants of the output format can be
3281produced as selected by the following options. The default variant
3282for pdp11-aout is the @samp{--omagic} option, whereas for other
3283targets @samp{--nmagic} is the default. The @samp{--imagic} option is
3284defined only for the pdp11-aout target, while the others are described
3285here as they apply to the pdp11-aout target.
3286
3287@table @gcctabopt
3288
3289@kindex -N
3290@item -N
3291@kindex --omagic
3292@itemx --omagic
3293
3294Mark the output as @code{OMAGIC} (0407) in the @file{a.out} header to
3295indicate that the text segment is not to be write-protected and
3296shared. Since the text and data sections are both readable and
3297writable, the data section is allocated immediately contiguous after
3298the text segment. This is the oldest format for PDP11 executable
3299programs and is the default for @command{ld} on PDP11 Unix systems
3300from the beginning through 2.11BSD.
3301
3302@kindex -n
3303@item -n
3304@kindex --nmagic
3305@itemx --nmagic
3306
3307Mark the output as @code{NMAGIC} (0410) in the @file{a.out} header to
3308indicate that when the output file is executed, the text portion will
3309be read-only and shareable among all processes executing the same
3310file. This involves moving the data areas up to the first possible 8K
3311byte page boundary following the end of the text. This option creates
3312a @emph{pure executable} format.
3313
3314@kindex -z
3315@item -z
3316@kindex --imagic
3317@itemx --imagic
3318
3319Mark the output as @code{IMAGIC} (0411) in the @file{a.out} header to
3320indicate that when the output file is executed, the program text and
3321data areas will be loaded into separate address spaces using the split
3322instruction and data space feature of the memory management unit in
3323larger models of the PDP11. This doubles the address space available
3324to the program. The text segment is again pure, write-protected, and
3325shareable. The only difference in the output format between this
3326option and the others, besides the magic number, is that both the text
3327and data sections start at location 0. The @samp{-z} option selected
3328this format in 2.11BSD. This option creates a @emph{separate
3329executable} format.
3330
3331@kindex --no-omagic
3332@item --no-omagic
3333
3334Equivalent to @samp{--nmagic} for pdp11-aout.
3335
3336@end table
3337
3338@c man end
3339@end ifset
3340
252b5132
RH
3341@ifset UsesEnvVars
3342@node Environment
3343@section Environment Variables
3344
0285c67d
NC
3345@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3346
560e09e9 3347You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3348@ifclear SingleFormat
3349@code{GNUTARGET},
3350@end ifclear
3351@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3352
36f63dca 3353@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3354@kindex GNUTARGET
3355@cindex default input format
3356@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3357use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3358of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3359@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3360of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3361attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3362this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3363there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3364object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3365BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3366in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3367@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3368
3369@kindex LDEMULATION
3370@cindex default emulation
3371@cindex emulation, default
3372@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3373@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3374behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3375available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3376the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3377variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3378linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3379
3380@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3381@cindex demangling, default
3382Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3383@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3384default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3385a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3386may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3387options.
3388
0285c67d
NC
3389@c man end
3390@end ifset
3391
252b5132
RH
3392@node Scripts
3393@chapter Linker Scripts
3394
3395@cindex scripts
3396@cindex linker scripts
3397@cindex command files
3398Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3399written in the linker command language.
3400
3401The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3402the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3403the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3404more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3405direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3406described below.
3407
3408The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3409yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
a05a5b64
TP
3410linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3411to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
252b5132
RH
3412such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3413
3414You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3415line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3416default linker script.
3417
3418You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3419to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3420Linker Scripts}.
3421
3422@menu
3423* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3424* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3425* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3426* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3427* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3428* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3429* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3430* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3431* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3432* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3433* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3434@end menu
3435
3436@node Basic Script Concepts
3437@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3438@cindex linker script concepts
3439We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3440describe the linker script language.
3441
3442The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3443file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3444@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3445The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3446purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3447among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3448section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3449in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3450
3451Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3452also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3453contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3454the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3455A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3456area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3457loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3458which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3459of debugging information.
3460
3461Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3462first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3463the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3464@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3465section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3466same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3467is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3468(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3469based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3470RAM address would be the VMA.
3471
3472You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3473program with the @samp{-h} option.
3474
3475Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3476@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3477has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3478information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3479will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3480static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3481referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3482
3483You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3484program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3485option.
3486
3487@node Script Format
3488@section Linker Script Format
3489@cindex linker script format
3490Linker scripts are text files.
3491
3492You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3493either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3494symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3495generally ignored.
3496
3497Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3498If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3499otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3500double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3501file name.
3502
3503You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3504@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3505to whitespace.
3506
3507@node Simple Example
3508@section Simple Linker Script Example
3509@cindex linker script example
3510@cindex example of linker script
3511Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3512
3513The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3514@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3515memory layout of the output file.
3516
3517The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3518describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3519code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3520@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3521Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3522your input files.
3523
3524For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
35250x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3526linker script which will do that:
3527@smallexample
3528SECTIONS
3529@{
3530 . = 0x10000;
3531 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3532 . = 0x8000000;
3533 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3534 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3535@}
3536@end smallexample
3537
3538You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3539followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3540descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3541
252b5132
RH
3542The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3543sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3544counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3545other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3546current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3547incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3548@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3549
3550The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3551required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3552after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3553which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3554wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3555means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3556
3557Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3558@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3559@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3560
3561The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3562the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3563at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3564output section, the value of the location counter will be
3565@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3566effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3567immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3568
3569The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3570alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3571example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3572sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3573may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3574sections.
3575
3576That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3577
3578@node Simple Commands
3579@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3580@cindex linker script simple commands
3581In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3582
3583@menu
3584* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3585* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3586@ifclear SingleFormat
3587* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3588@end ifclear
3589
4a93e180 3590* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3591* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3592@end menu
3593
3594@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3595@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3596@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3597@cindex start of execution
3598@cindex first instruction
3599@cindex entry point
3600The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3601point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3602entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3603@smallexample
3604ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3605@end smallexample
3606
3607There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3608entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3609stopping when one of them succeeds:
3610@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3611@item
252b5132 3612the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3613@item
252b5132 3614the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3615@item
a094d01f 3616the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
8a758655 3617targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3ab904c4 3618check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3619@item
252b5132 3620the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3621@item
252b5132
RH
3622The address @code{0}.
3623@end itemize
3624
3625@node File Commands
36f63dca 3626@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3627@cindex linker script file commands
3628Several linker script commands deal with files.
3629
3630@table @code
3631@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3632@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3633@cindex including a linker script
3634Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3635be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3636with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
363710 levels deep.
3638
4006703d
NS
3639You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3640@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3641
252b5132
RH
3642@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3643@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3644@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3645@cindex input files in linker scripts
3646@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3647@cindex linker script input object files
3648The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3649in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3650
3651For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3652a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3653then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3654
3655In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3656script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3657
e3f2db7f
AO
3658In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3659with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3660located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
16171946
FS
3661for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying
3662@code{=} as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the
3663filename path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of
3664@samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3665
3666If a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is not used then the linker will try to open
3667the file in the directory containing the linker script. If it is not
3668found the linker will then search the current directory. If it is still
3669not found the linker will search through the archive library search
3670path.
252b5132 3671
ff5dcc92 3672If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
a05a5b64 3673name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
252b5132
RH
3674@samp{-l}.
3675
3676When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3677files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3678script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3679
3680@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3681@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3682@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3683@cindex grouping input files
3684The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3685files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3686new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
a05a5b64 3687in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3688
b717d30e
JJ
3689@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3690@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3691@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3692This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3693commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3694as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3695with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3696when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3697@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3698and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3699setting afterwards.
3700
252b5132
RH
3701@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3702@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3703@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3704The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3705@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3706@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
a05a5b64 3707Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
252b5132
RH
3708precedence.
3709
3710You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3711output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3712
3713@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3714@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3715@cindex library search path in linker script
3716@cindex archive search path in linker script
3717@cindex search path in linker script
3718The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3719@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132 3720@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
a05a5b64 3721on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
252b5132 3722are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
a05a5b64 3723the command-line option are searched first.
252b5132
RH
3724
3725@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3726@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3727@cindex first input file
3728The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3729that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3730though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3731when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3732first file.
3733@end table
3734
3735@ifclear SingleFormat
3736@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3737@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3738A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3739
3740@table @code
3741@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3742@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3743@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3744@cindex output file format in linker script
3745The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3746output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3747exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3748(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
252b5132
RH
3749line option takes precedence.
3750
3751You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
a05a5b64 3752formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
252b5132
RH
3753This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3754desired endianness.
3755
3756If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3757will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3758output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3759used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3760
3761For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3762command:
3763@smallexample
3764OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3765@end smallexample
3766This says that the default format for the output file is
a05a5b64 3767@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
252b5132
RH
3768option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3769format.
3770
3771@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3772@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3773@cindex input file format in linker script
3774The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3775files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3776This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3777(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
252b5132
RH
3778is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3779command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3780@end table
3781@end ifclear
3782
4a93e180
NC
3783@node REGION_ALIAS
3784@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3785@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3786@cindex region alias
3787@cindex region names
3788
3789Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3790@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3791
3792@smallexample
3793REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3794@end smallexample
3795
3796The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3797memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3798to memory regions. An example follows.
3799
3800Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3801memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3802that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3803non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3804access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3805read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3806sections:
3807
3808@itemize @bullet
3809@item
3810@code{.text} program code;
3811@item
3812@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3813@item
3814@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3815@item
3816@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3817@end itemize
3818
3819The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3820part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3821output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3822systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3823@code{C}:
3824@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3825@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3826@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3827@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3828@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3829@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3830@end multitable
3831The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3832loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3833the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3834the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3835
3836The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3837includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3838memory layout:
3839@smallexample
3840INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3841
3842SECTIONS
3843 @{
3844 .text :
3845 @{
3846 *(.text)
3847 @} > REGION_TEXT
3848 .rodata :
3849 @{
3850 *(.rodata)
3851 rodata_end = .;
3852 @} > REGION_RODATA
3853 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3854 @{
3855 data_start = .;
3856 *(.data)
3857 @} > REGION_DATA
3858 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3859 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3860 .bss :
3861 @{
3862 *(.bss)
3863 @} > REGION_BSS
3864 @}
3865@end smallexample
3866
3867Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3868regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3869variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3870@table @code
3871@item A
3872Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3873@smallexample
3874MEMORY
3875 @{
3876 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3877 @}
3878
3879REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3880REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3881REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3882REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3883@end smallexample
3884@item B
3885Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3886into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3887@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3888@smallexample
3889MEMORY
3890 @{
3891 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3892 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3893 @}
3894
3895REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3896REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3897REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3898REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3899@end smallexample
3900@item C
3901Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3902@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3903initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3904system start into the @code{RAM}.
3905@smallexample
3906MEMORY
3907 @{
3908 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3909 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3910 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3911 @}
3912
3913REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3914REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3915REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3916REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3917@end smallexample
3918@end table
3919
3920It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3921@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3922necessary:
3923@smallexample
3924#include <string.h>
3925
3926extern char data_start [];
3927extern char data_size [];
3928extern char data_load_start [];
3929
3930void copy_data(void)
3931@{
3932 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3933 @{
3934 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3935 @}
3936@}
3937@end smallexample
3938
252b5132 3939@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3940@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3941There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3942
3943@table @code
3944@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3945@kindex ASSERT
3946@cindex assertion in linker script
3947Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3948with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3949
fd1c4238
NC
3950Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3951take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3952inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3953for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3954symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3955
3956@smallexample
3957 .stack :
3958 @{
3959 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3960 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3961 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3962 @}
3963@end smallexample
3964
3965will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3966PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3967can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3968
3969@smallexample
3970 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3971 .stack :
3972 @{
3973 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3974 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3975 @}
3976@end smallexample
3977
3978will work.
3979
252b5132
RH
3980@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3981@kindex EXTERN
3982@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3983Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3984symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3985modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3986each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3987command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3988
3989@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3990@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3991@cindex common allocation in linker script
3992This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3993to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3994output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3995
4818e05f
AM
3996@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3997@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3998@cindex common allocation in linker script
3999This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
4000command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
4001to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
4002
7bdf4127
AB
4003@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
4004@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
4005@cindex group allocation in linker script
4006@cindex section groups
4007@cindex COMDAT
4008This command has the same effect as the
4009@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
4010@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
4011and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
4012specified (@samp{-r}).
4013
53d25da6
AM
4014@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
4015@kindex INSERT
4016@cindex insert user script into default script
4017This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
4018augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
4019inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
4020@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
4021default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
4022sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
4023linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
4024insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
4025linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
4026default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
4027of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
4028to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
4029is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
4030
4031@smallexample
4032SECTIONS
4033@{
4034 OVERLAY :
4035 @{
4036 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
4037 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
4038 @}
4039@}
4040INSERT AFTER .text;
4041@end smallexample
4042
252b5132
RH
4043@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
4044@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
4045@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 4046This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
4047references among certain output sections.
4048
4049In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
4050using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
4051will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
4052errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
4053a function defined in the other section.
4054
4055The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 4056@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
4057an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
4058@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
4059names.
4060
cdf96953
MF
4061@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
4062@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
4063@cindex cross references
4064This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
4065references to one section from a list of other sections.
4066
4067The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
4068output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
4069a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
4070there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
4071must never call back.
4072
4073The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
4074The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
4075If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
4076the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
4077status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
4078names, not input section names.
4079
252b5132
RH
4080@ifclear SingleFormat
4081@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4082@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4083@cindex machine architecture
4084@cindex architecture
4085Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
4086of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
4087architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
4088the @samp{-f} option.
4089@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
4090
4091@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4092@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4093This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
4094@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
4095in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
4096@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
4097@end table
4098
4099@node Assignments
4100@section Assigning Values to Symbols
4101@cindex assignment in scripts
4102@cindex symbol definition, scripts
4103@cindex variables, defining
4104You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 4105the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
4106
4107@menu
4108* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 4109* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 4110* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 4111* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 4112* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
4113@end menu
4114
4115@node Simple Assignments
4116@subsection Simple Assignments
4117
4118You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
4119
4120@table @code
4121@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
4122@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
4123@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
4124@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
4125@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
4126@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
4127@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
4128@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
4129@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
4130@end table
4131
4132The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
4133@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
4134defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
4135
4136The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 4137may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
4138
4139The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4140
4141Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4142
4143You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4144statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4145section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4146
4147The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4148expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4149
4150Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4151assignments may be used:
4152
4153@smallexample
4154floating_point = 0;
4155SECTIONS
4156@{
4157 .text :
4158 @{
4159 *(.text)
4160 _etext = .;
4161 @}
156e34dd 4162 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
4163 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4164@}
4165@end smallexample
4166@noindent
4167In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4168zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4169the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4170defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4171upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4172
eb8476a6
MR
4173@node HIDDEN
4174@subsection HIDDEN
4175@cindex HIDDEN
4176For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4177exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4178
4179Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4180@code{HIDDEN}:
4181
4182@smallexample
4183HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4184SECTIONS
4185@{
4186 .text :
4187 @{
4188 *(.text)
4189 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4190 @}
4191 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4192 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4193@}
4194@end smallexample
4195@noindent
4196In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4197
252b5132
RH
4198@node PROVIDE
4199@subsection PROVIDE
4200@cindex PROVIDE
4201In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4202only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4203the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4204@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4205@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4206@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4207@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4208@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4209
4210Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4211@smallexample
4212SECTIONS
4213@{
4214 .text :
4215 @{
4216 *(.text)
4217 _etext = .;
4218 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4219 @}
4220@}
4221@end smallexample
4222
4223In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4224underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4225the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4226underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4227If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4228linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4229
b0daac83
NC
4230Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4231defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4232that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4233when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4234@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4235
7af8e998
L
4236@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4237@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4238@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4239Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4240hidden and won't be exported.
4241
73ae6183
NC
4242@node Source Code Reference
4243@subsection Source Code Reference
4244
4245Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4246intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4247a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4248symbol that does not have a value.
4249
4250Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4251transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4252stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4253prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4254mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4255of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4256variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4257linker script variable might be referred to as:
4258
4259@smallexample
4260 extern int foo;
4261@end smallexample
4262
4263But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4264
4265@smallexample
4266 _foo = 1000;
4267@end smallexample
4268
4269In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4270transformation has taken place.
4271
4272When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4273things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4274in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4275second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4276table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4277contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4278value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4279
4280@smallexample
4281 int foo = 1000;
4282@end smallexample
4283
10bf6894 4284creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4285holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4286number 1000 is initially stored.
4287
4288When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4289first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4290memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4291So:
4292
4293@smallexample
4294 foo = 1;
4295@end smallexample
4296
4297looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4298associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4299address. Whereas:
4300
4301@smallexample
4302 int * a = & foo;
4303@end smallexample
4304
10bf6894 4305looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4306and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4307the variable @samp{a}.
4308
4309Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4310the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4311an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4312
4313@smallexample
4314 foo = 1000;
4315@end smallexample
4316
4317creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4318the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4319address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4320linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4321access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4322
4323Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4324you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4325use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4326section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4327linker script contains these declarations:
4328
4329@smallexample
4330@group
4331 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4332 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4333 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4334@end group
4335@end smallexample
4336
4337Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4338
4339@smallexample
4340@group
4341 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4342
73ae6183
NC
4343 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4344@end group
4345@end smallexample
4346
4347Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4348Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4349arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4350
4351@smallexample
4352@group
4353 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4354
4355 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4356@end group
4357@end smallexample
4358
4359Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4360operators.
73ae6183 4361
252b5132 4362@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4363@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4364@kindex SECTIONS
4365The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4366into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4367
4368The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4369@smallexample
4370SECTIONS
4371@{
4372 @var{sections-command}
4373 @var{sections-command}
4374 @dots{}
4375@}
4376@end smallexample
4377
4378Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4379
4380@itemize @bullet
4381@item
4382an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4383@item
4384a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4385@item
4386an output section description
4387@item
4388an overlay description
4389@end itemize
4390
4391The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4392@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4393those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4394understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4395the layout of the output file.
4396
4397Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4398below.
4399
4400If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4401linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4402section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4403input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4404example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4405in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4406
4407@menu
4408* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4409* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4410* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4411* Input Section:: Input section description
4412* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4413* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4414* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4415* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4416* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4417@end menu
4418
4419@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4420@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4421The full description of an output section looks like this:
4422@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4423@group
7e7d5768 4424@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4425 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4426 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4427 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4428 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4429 @{
4430 @var{output-section-command}
4431 @var{output-section-command}
4432 @dots{}
abc9061b 4433 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4434@end group
4435@end smallexample
4436
4437Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4438
4439The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4440name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4441The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4442the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4443The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4444
4445Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4446
4447@itemize @bullet
4448@item
4449a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4450@item
4451an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4452@item
4453data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4454@item
4455a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4456@end itemize
4457
4458@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4459@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4460@cindex name, section
4461@cindex section name
4462The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4463meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4464support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4465must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4466example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4467output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4468names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4469quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4470characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4471commas must be quoted.
4472
4473The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4474Discarding}.
4475
4476@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4477@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4478@cindex address, section
4479@cindex section address
4480The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4481address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4482is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4483
4484If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4485section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4486to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4487alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4488contained within the output section.
4489
4490The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4491
4492@itemize @bullet
4493@item
4494If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4495is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4496in that region.
4497
4498@item
4499If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4500regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4501section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4502be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4503
4504@item
4505If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4506the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4507counter.
4508@end itemize
4509
4510@noindent
4511For example:
4512
252b5132
RH
4513@smallexample
4514.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4515@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4516
252b5132
RH
4517@noindent
4518and
ea5cae92 4519
252b5132
RH
4520@smallexample
4521.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4522@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4523
252b5132
RH
4524@noindent
4525are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4526@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4527counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4528counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4529input sections.
252b5132
RH
4530
4531The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4532For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4533so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4534do something like this:
4535@smallexample
4536.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4537@end smallexample
4538@noindent
4539This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4540aligned upward to the specified value.
4541
4542Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4543location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4544sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4545
4546@node Input Section
36f63dca 4547@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4548@cindex input sections
4549@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4550The most common output section command is an input section description.
4551
4552The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4553You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4554in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4555map the input files into your memory layout.
4556
4557@menu
4558* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4559* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4560* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4561* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4562* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4563@end menu
4564
4565@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4566@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4567@cindex input section basics
4568An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4569by a list of section names in parentheses.
4570
4571The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4572describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4573
4574The most common input section description is to include all input
4575sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4576include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4577@smallexample
4578*(.text)
4579@end smallexample
4580@noindent
18625d54 4581Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4582@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4583of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4584match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4585example:
252b5132 4586@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4587EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4588@end smallexample
4589@noindent
4590will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4591and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4592placed inside the section list, for example:
4593@smallexample
b4346c09 4594*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4595@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4596@noindent
4597The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4598two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4599more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4600
4601There are two ways to include more than one section:
4602@smallexample
4603*(.text .rdata)
4604*(.text) *(.rdata)
4605@end smallexample
4606@noindent
4607The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4608@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4609first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4610they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4611@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4612@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4613
8f1732fc
AB
4614When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4615is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4616immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4617@smallexample
4618*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4619@end smallexample
4620@noindent
4621will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4622@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4623from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4624exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4625could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4626@smallexample
4627*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4628@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4629@noindent
4630Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4631before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4632all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4633@smallexample
4634EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4635@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4636
252b5132
RH
4637You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4638You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4639needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4640@smallexample
4641data.o(.data)
4642@end smallexample
4643
ae17ab41
CM
4644To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4645of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4646
4647Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4648
4649@smallexample
4650@group
4651SECTIONS @{
4652 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4653 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4654@}
4655@end group
4656@end smallexample
4657
4658In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4659input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4660@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4661@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4662whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4663
967928e9
AM
4664You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4665matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4666with no whitespace around the colon.
4667
4668@table @samp
4669@item archive:file
4670matches file within archive
4671@item archive:
4672matches the whole archive
4673@item :file
4674matches file but not one in an archive
4675@end table
4676
4677Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4678wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4679single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4680@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4681within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4682also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4683other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4684from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4685command.
4686
252b5132
RH
4687If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4688the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4689commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4690@smallexample
4691data.o
4692@end smallexample
4693
967928e9
AM
4694When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4695and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4696characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4697name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4698did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4699though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4700@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4701the archive search path.
4702
4703@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4704@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4705@cindex input section wildcards
4706@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4707@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4708@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4709In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4710name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4711
4712The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4713pattern for the file name.
4714
4715The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4716
4717@table @samp
4718@item *
4719matches any number of characters
4720@item ?
4721matches any single character
4722@item [@var{chars}]
4723matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4724character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4725@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4726@item \
4727quotes the following character
4728@end table
4729
4730When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4731will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4732Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4733exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4734@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4735a @samp{/} character.
4736
4737File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4738specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4739does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4740
4741If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4742appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4743will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4744sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4745@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4746@smallexample
4747.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4748.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4749@end smallexample
4750
bcaa7b3e 4751@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4752Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4753in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4754this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4755pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4756@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4757into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4758
bcaa7b3e 4759@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
9a24a276
AM
4760@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4761@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into descending order of
4762alignment before placing them in the output file. Placing larger
4763alignments before smaller alignments can reduce the amount of padding
4764needed.
bcaa7b3e 4765
02ecc8e9 4766@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
9a24a276
AM
4767@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is also similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4768@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into ascending
4769numerical order of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in the
4770section name before placing them in the output file. In
4771@code{.init_array.NNNNN} and @code{.fini_array.NNNNN}, @code{NNNNN} is
4772the init_priority. In @code{.ctors.NNNNN} and @code{.dtors.NNNNN},
4773@code{NNNNN} is 65535 minus the init_priority.
02ecc8e9 4774
bcaa7b3e
L
4775@cindex SORT
4776@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4777
4778When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4779can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4780
4781@enumerate
4782@item
4783@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4784It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4785sections have the same name.
4786@item
4787@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4788It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4789sections have the same alignment.
4790@item
c0065db7 4791@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4792treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4793@item
4794@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4795is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4796@item
4797All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4798@end enumerate
4799
a05a5b64 4800When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
bcaa7b3e 4801section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
a05a5b64 4802takes precedence over the command-line option.
bcaa7b3e
L
4803
4804If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
a05a5b64 4805command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
bcaa7b3e
L
4806treated as nested sorting command.
4807
4808@enumerate
4809@item
4810@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4811@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4812@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4813@item
4814@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4815@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4816@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4817@end enumerate
4818
4819If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
a05a5b64 4820command-line option will be ignored.
bcaa7b3e 4821
eda680f8 4822@cindex SORT_NONE
a05a5b64 4823@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
eda680f8
L
4824section sorting option.
4825
252b5132
RH
4826If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4827@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4828precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4829
4830This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4831files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4832sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4833The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4834with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4835linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4836@smallexample
4837@group
4838SECTIONS @{
4839 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4840 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4841 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4842 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4843@}
4844@end group
4845@end smallexample
4846
4847@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4848@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4849@cindex common symbol placement
4850@cindex uninitialized data placement
4851A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4852file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4853linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4854named @samp{COMMON}.
4855
4856You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4857other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4858particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4859input files are placed in another section.
4860
4861In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4862@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4863@smallexample
4864.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4865@end smallexample
4866
4867@cindex scommon section
4868@cindex small common symbols
4869Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4870example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4871symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4872different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4873the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4874symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4875to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4876locations.
4877
4878@cindex [COMMON]
4879You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4880notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4881@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4882
4883@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4884@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4885@cindex KEEP
4886@cindex garbage collection
4887When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4888it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4889This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4890with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4891@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4892
4893@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4894@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4895The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4896to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4897start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4898@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4899follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4900@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4901@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4902All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4903files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4904
4905@smallexample
4906@group
4907SECTIONS @{
4908 outputa 0x10000 :
4909 @{
4910 all.o
4911 foo.o (.input1)
4912 @}
36f63dca
NC
4913@end group
4914@group
252b5132
RH
4915 outputb :
4916 @{
4917 foo.o (.input2)
4918 foo1.o (.input1)
4919 @}
36f63dca
NC
4920@end group
4921@group
252b5132
RH
4922 outputc :
4923 @{
4924 *(.input1)
4925 *(.input2)
4926 @}
4927@}
4928@end group
a1ab1d2a 4929@end smallexample
252b5132 4930
cbd0eecf
L
4931If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4932and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4933automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4934__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4935indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4936respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4937C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4938
252b5132 4939@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4940@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4941@cindex data
4942@cindex section data
4943@cindex output section data
4944@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4945@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4946@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4947@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4948@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4949You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4950@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4951an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4952parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4953value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4954counter.
4955
4956The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4957store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4958bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4959stored.
4960
4961For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4962of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4963@smallexample
4964BYTE(1)
4965LONG(addr)
4966@end smallexample
4967
4968When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4969same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4970target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4971@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4972@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4973
4974If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4975which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4976When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4977true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4978endianness of the first input object file.
4979
36f63dca 4980Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4981between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4982@smallexample
4983SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4984@end smallexample
4985whereas this will work:
4986@smallexample
4987SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4988@end smallexample
4989
252b5132
RH
4990@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4991@cindex holes, filling
4992@cindex unspecified memory
4993You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4994current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4995otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4996gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4997with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4998necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4999point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
5000than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
5001different parts of an output section.
5002
5003This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 5004value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 5005@smallexample
563e308f 5006FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
5007@end smallexample
5008
5009The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 5010section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
5011part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
5012entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 5013precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 5014expression.
252b5132
RH
5015
5016@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 5017@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
5018There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
5019commands.
5020
5021@table @code
5022@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
5023@cindex input filename symbols
5024@cindex filename symbols
5025@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
5026The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
5027The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
5028file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
5029the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
5030
5031This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
5032normally used for any other object file format.
5033
5034@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
5035@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
5036@cindex constructors, arranging in link
5037@item CONSTRUCTORS
5038When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
5039unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
5040destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
5041arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
5042automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
5043For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
5044linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
5045@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
5046ignored for other object file formats.
5047
5048The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
5049constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
5050Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
5051the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
5052first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
5053of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
5054compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
5055formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
5056@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
5057the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
5058destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
5059@code{exit}.
5060
5061For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
5062arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
5063addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
5064and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
5065linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
5066runtime code expects to see.
5067
5068@smallexample
5069 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
5070 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
5071 *(.ctors)
5072 LONG(0)
5073 __CTOR_END__ = .;
5074 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
5075 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
5076 *(.dtors)
5077 LONG(0)
5078 __DTOR_END__ = .;
5079@end smallexample
5080
5081If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
5082which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
5083are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
5084are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
5085command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
5086@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
5087@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
5088@samp{*(.dtors)}.
5089
5090Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
5091and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
5092need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
5093scripts.
5094
5095@end table
5096
5097@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 5098@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
5099@cindex discarding sections
5100@cindex sections, discarding
5101@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
5102The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
5103This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
5104may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 5105@smallexample
49c13adb 5106.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
5107@end smallexample
5108@noindent
5109will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
5110@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
5111sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
5112space in an output section will also create the output section. So
5113too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
5114space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
5115@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
5116@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
5117This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 5118
a0976ea4 5119The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
5120on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
5121symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
5122the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
5123section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
5124
5125@cindex /DISCARD/
5126The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
5127input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
5128section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
5129
a2e098c3
NC
5130Note, sections that match the @samp{/DISCARD/} output section will be
5131discarded even if they are in an ELF section group which has other
5132members which are not being discarded. This is deliberate.
5133Discarding takes precedence over grouping.
5134
252b5132 5135@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 5136@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
5137@cindex output section attributes
5138We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
5139like this:
0c71d759 5140
252b5132 5141@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 5142@group
7e7d5768 5143@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 5144 [AT(@var{lma})]
3bbec4bd 5145 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
5146 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5147 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
5148 @{
5149 @var{output-section-command}
5150 @var{output-section-command}
5151 @dots{}
562d3460 5152 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
5153@end group
5154@end smallexample
0c71d759 5155
252b5132
RH
5156We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5157@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5158remaining section attributes.
5159
a1ab1d2a 5160@menu
252b5132
RH
5161* Output Section Type:: Output section type
5162* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 5163* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 5164* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 5165* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
5166* Output Section Region:: Output section region
5167* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5168* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5169@end menu
5170
5171@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 5172@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
5173Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5174parentheses. The following types are defined:
5175
5176@table @code
5177@item NOLOAD
5178The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5179loaded into memory when the program is run.
5180@item DSECT
5181@itemx COPY
5182@itemx INFO
5183@itemx OVERLAY
5184These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5185rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5186marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5187section when the program is run.
5188@end table
5189
5190@kindex NOLOAD
5191@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5192@cindex loading, preventing
5193The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5194the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5195the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5196@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 5197need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
5198@smallexample
5199@group
5200SECTIONS @{
5201 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5202 @dots{}
5203@}
5204@end group
5205@end smallexample
5206
5207@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 5208@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 5209@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
5210@kindex AT(@var{lma})
5211@cindex load address
5212@cindex section load address
5213Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
5214@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5215@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5216specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5217address is optional.
6bdafbeb 5218
ea5cae92
NC
5219The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5220specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5221takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5222load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5223region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
5224
5225If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
5226section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5227load address:
5228
5229@itemize @bullet
5230@item
5231If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5232the LMA address as well.
5233
5234@item
5235If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5236
5237@item
5238Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5239with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5240section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5241VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5242the last section in the located region.
5243
5244@item
5245If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5246that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5247
5248@item
5249If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5250section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5251@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5252
5253@cindex ROM initialized data
5254@cindex initialized data in ROM
5255This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5256example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5257called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5258@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5259even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5260uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5261defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5262counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5263
5264@smallexample
5265@group
5266SECTIONS
5267 @{
5268 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5269 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5270 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5271 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5272 .bss 0x3000 :
5273 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5274@}
5275@end group
5276@end smallexample
5277
5278The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5279this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5280the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5281how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5282script.
5283
5284@smallexample
5285@group
5286extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5287char *src = &_etext;
5288char *dst = &_data;
5289
ea5cae92
NC
5290/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5291while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5292 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5293
ea5cae92 5294/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5295for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5296 *dst = 0;
5297@end group
5298@end smallexample
5299
bbf115d3
L
5300@node Forced Output Alignment
5301@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5302@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5303@cindex forcing output section alignment
5304@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5305You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5306alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5307intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5308
7e7d5768
AM
5309@node Forced Input Alignment
5310@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5311@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5312@cindex forcing input section alignment
5313@cindex input section alignment
5314You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5315SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5316sections, whether larger or smaller.
5317
0c71d759
NC
5318@node Output Section Constraint
5319@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5320@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5321@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5322@cindex constraints on output sections
5323You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5324of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5325read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5326@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5327
252b5132 5328@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5329@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5330@kindex >@var{region}
5331@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5332@cindex memory regions and sections
5333You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5334using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5335
5336Here is a simple example:
5337@smallexample
5338@group
5339MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5340SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5341@end group
5342@end smallexample
5343
5344@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5345@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5346@kindex :@var{phdr}
5347@cindex section, assigning to program header
5348@cindex program headers and sections
5349You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5350using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5351one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5352assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5353@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5354linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5355
5356Here is a simple example:
5357@smallexample
5358@group
5359PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5360SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5361@end group
5362@end smallexample
5363
5364@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5365@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5366@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5367@cindex section fill pattern
5368@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5369You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5370@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5371(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5372within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5373alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5374necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5375of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5376an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5377fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5378other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5379pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5380expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5381
5382You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5383output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5384
5385Here is a simple example:
5386@smallexample
5387@group
563e308f 5388SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5389@end group
5390@end smallexample
5391
5392@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5393@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5394@kindex OVERLAY
5395@cindex overlays
5396An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5397are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5398the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5399copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5400required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5401can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5402than another.
5403
5404Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5405@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5406output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5407command is as follows:
5408@smallexample
5409@group
5410OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5411 @{
5412 @var{secname1}
5413 @{
5414 @var{output-section-command}
5415 @var{output-section-command}
5416 @dots{}
5417 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5418 @var{secname2}
5419 @{
5420 @var{output-section-command}
5421 @var{output-section-command}
5422 @dots{}
5423 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5424 @dots{}
abc9061b 5425 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5426@end group
5427@end smallexample
5428
5429Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5430section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5431section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5432those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5433except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5434sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5435
abc9061b
CC
5436The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5437the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5438
252b5132
RH
5439The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5440addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5441memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5442whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5443and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5444and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5445
56dd11f0
NC
5446If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5447references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5448the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5449sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5450@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5451
5452For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5453provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5454defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5455@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5456the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5457within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5458symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5459
5460At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5461the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5462
5463Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5464@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5465@smallexample
5466@group
5467 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5468 @{
5469 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5470 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5471 @}
5472@end group
5473@end smallexample
5474@noindent
5475This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5476address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5477@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5478following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5479@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5480@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5481
5482C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5483like the following.
5484
5485@smallexample
5486@group
5487 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5488 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5489 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5490@end group
5491@end smallexample
5492
5493Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5494everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5495example could have been written identically as follows.
5496
5497@smallexample
5498@group
5499 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5500 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5501 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5502 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5503 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5504 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5505 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5506@end group
5507@end smallexample
5508
5509@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5510@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5511@kindex MEMORY
5512@cindex memory regions
5513@cindex regions of memory
5514@cindex allocating memory
5515@cindex discontinuous memory
5516The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5517memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5518
5519The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5520memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5521may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5522can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5523set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5524regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5525around to fit into the available regions.
5526
127fcdff
AB
5527A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5528however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5529specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5530@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5531@smallexample
5532@group
a1ab1d2a 5533MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5534 @{
5535 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5536 @dots{}
5537 @}
5538@end group
5539@end smallexample
5540
5541The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5542region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5543Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5544with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5545must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5546add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5547command.
252b5132
RH
5548
5549@cindex memory region attributes
5550The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5551whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5552not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5553@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5554section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5555the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5556them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5557
5558The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5559@table @samp
5560@item R
5561Read-only section
5562@item W
5563Read/write section
5564@item X
5565Executable section
5566@item A
5567Allocatable section
5568@item I
5569Initialized section
5570@item L
5571Same as @samp{I}
5572@item !
c09e9a8c 5573Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5574@end table
5575
81c688d5 5576If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
252b5132 5577@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
81c688d5
NC
5578attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5579unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5580not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5581string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5582or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5583the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
252b5132
RH
5584
5585@kindex ORIGIN =
5586@kindex o =
5587@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5588The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5589the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5590cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5591abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5592@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5593
5594@kindex LENGTH =
5595@kindex len =
5596@kindex l =
5597The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5598region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5599be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5600@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5601
5602In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5603available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5604and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5605linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5606is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5607or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5608explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5609region.
5610
5611@smallexample
5612@group
a1ab1d2a 5613MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5614 @{
5615 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5616 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5617 @}
5618@end group
5619@end smallexample
5620
5621Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5622specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5623@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5624a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5625output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5626was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5627the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5628output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5629region, the linker will issue an error message.
5630
3ec57632 5631It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5632expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5633@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5634
5635@smallexample
5636@group
c0065db7 5637 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5638@end group
5639@end smallexample
5640
252b5132
RH
5641@node PHDRS
5642@section PHDRS Command
5643@kindex PHDRS
5644@cindex program headers
5645@cindex ELF program headers
5646@cindex program segments
5647@cindex segments, ELF
5648The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5649@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5650loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5651program with the @samp{-p} option.
5652
5653When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5654reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5655program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5656This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5657interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5658
5659The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5660in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5661precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5662the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5663not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5664
5665The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5666generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5667ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5668
5669This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5670@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5671
5672@smallexample
5673@group
5674PHDRS
5675@{
5676 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5677 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5678@}
5679@end group
5680@end smallexample
5681
5682The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5683of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5684header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5685with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5686must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5687is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5688
5689Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5690system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5691specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5692sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5693attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5694Section Phdr}.
5695
5696It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5697merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5698repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5699contain the section.
5700
5701If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5702then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5703not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5704convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5705placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5706default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5707segment at all.
5708
5709@kindex FILEHDR
5710@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5711You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5712the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5713The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5714file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5715include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5716segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5717these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5718
5719The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5720value of the keyword.
5721
5722@table @asis
5723@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5724Indicates an unused program header.
5725
5726@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5727Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5728the file.
5729
5730@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5731Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5732
5733@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5734Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5735found.
5736
5737@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5738Indicates a segment holding note information.
5739
5740@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5741A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5742ABI.
5743
5744@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5745Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5746
1a9ccd70
NC
5747@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5748Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5749
252b5132
RH
5750@item @var{expression}
5751An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5752be used for types not defined above.
5753@end table
5754
5755You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5756in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5757@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5758Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5759output section attribute.
5760
5761The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5762which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5763explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5764an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5765header.
5766
5767Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5768headers used on a native ELF system.
5769
5770@example
5771@group
5772PHDRS
5773@{
5774 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5775 interp PT_INTERP ;
5776 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5777 data PT_LOAD ;
5778 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5779@}
5780
5781SECTIONS
5782@{
5783 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5784 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5785 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5786 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5787 @dots{}
5788 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5789 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5790 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5791 @dots{}
5792@}
5793@end group
5794@end example
5795
5796@node VERSION
5797@section VERSION Command
5798@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5799@cindex symbol versions
5800@cindex version script
5801@cindex versions of symbols
5802The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5803only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5804symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5805a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5806shared library.
5807
5808You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5809you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5810also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5811
5812The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5813@smallexample
5814VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5815@end smallexample
5816
5817The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5818Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5819version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5820version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5821version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5822scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5823library.
5824
5825The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5826examples.
5827
5828@smallexample
5829VERS_1.1 @{
5830 global:
5831 foo1;
5832 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5833 old*;
5834 original*;
5835 new*;
252b5132
RH
5836@};
5837
5838VERS_1.2 @{
5839 foo2;
5840@} VERS_1.1;
5841
5842VERS_2.0 @{
5843 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5844 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5845 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5846 "f(int, double)";
5847 @};
252b5132
RH
5848@} VERS_1.2;
5849@end smallexample
5850
5851This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5852version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5853The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5854a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5855of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5856symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5857is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5858in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5859However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5860name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5861
5862Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5863depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5864to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5865
5866Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5867depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5868and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5869
5870When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5871specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5872unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5873unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5874somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5875wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5876wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5877set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5878ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5879
5880The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5881they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5882could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5883However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5884
0f6bf451 5885Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5886in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5887symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5888won't.
5889
5890@smallexample
7c9c73be 5891@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5892@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5893
252b5132
RH
5894When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5895symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5896requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5897shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5898loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5899linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5900application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5901way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5902all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5903search for each symbol reference.
5904
5905The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5906doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5907that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5908functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5909the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5910required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5911that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5912versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5913the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5914
5915There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5916first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5917source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5918script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5919maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5920@smallexample
5921__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5922@end smallexample
5923@noindent
5924in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5925be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5926The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5927@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5928takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5929
5930The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5931function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5932an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5933version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5934linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5935
5936To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5937source file. Here is an example:
5938
5939@smallexample
5940__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5941__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5942__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5943__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5944@end smallexample
5945
5946In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5947unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5948example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5949@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5950
5951When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5952some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5953this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5954@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5955declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5956you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5957
5958If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5959within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5960(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5961specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5962
cb840a31
L
5963You can also specify the language in the version script:
5964
5965@smallexample
5966VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5967@end smallexample
5968
c0065db7 5969The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5970The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5971demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5972patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5973@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5974
86043bbb
MM
5975Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5976described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5977or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5978the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5979whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5980cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5981might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5982should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5983expect when you upgrade.
5984
252b5132
RH
5985@node Expressions
5986@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5987@cindex expressions
5988@cindex arithmetic
5989The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5990that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5991expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5992host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5993
5994You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5995
5996The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5997expressions.
5998
5999@menu
6000* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 6001* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 6002* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 6003* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
6004* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
6005* Operators:: Operators
6006* Evaluation:: Evaluation
6007* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
6008* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
6009@end menu
6010
6011@node Constants
6012@subsection Constants
6013@cindex integer notation
6014@cindex constants in linker scripts
6015All constants are integers.
6016
6017As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
6018octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 6019hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 6020@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
6021@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
6022value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
6023
6024@cindex scaled integers
6025@cindex K and M integer suffixes
6026@cindex M and K integer suffixes
6027@cindex suffixes for integers
6028@cindex integer suffixes
6029In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
6030constant by
6031@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6032@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6033@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6034@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
6035@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6036@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6037@tex
6038${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
6039@end tex
6040@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
6041respectively. For example, the following
6042all refer to the same quantity:
6043
252b5132 6044@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
6045_fourk_1 = 4K;
6046_fourk_2 = 4096;
6047_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 6048_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
6049@end smallexample
6050
8a308ae8
NC
6051Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
6052conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
6053
0c71d759
NC
6054@node Symbolic Constants
6055@subsection Symbolic Constants
6056@cindex symbolic constants
6057@kindex CONSTANT
a094d01f 6058It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
0c71d759
NC
6059the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
6060
6061@table @code
6062@item MAXPAGESIZE
6063@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
6064The target's maximum page size.
6065
6066@item COMMONPAGESIZE
6067@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
6068The target's default page size.
6069@end table
6070
6071So for example:
6072
6073@smallexample
9d5777a3 6074 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
6075@end smallexample
6076
6077will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
6078supported by the target.
6079
252b5132
RH
6080@node Symbols
6081@subsection Symbol Names
6082@cindex symbol names
6083@cindex names
6084@cindex quoted symbol names
6085@kindex "
6086Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
6087and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
6088Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
6089specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
6090keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
6091@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
6092"SECTION" = 9;
6093"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
6094@end smallexample
6095
6096Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
6097to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
6098whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
6099
ecca9871
L
6100@node Orphan Sections
6101@subsection Orphan Sections
6102@cindex orphan
6103Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
6104are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
6105script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
6106output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
6107in which to place the orphaned input section.
6108
6109If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
6110an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
6111placed at the end of that output section.
6112
6113If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
6114sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
6115name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
6116orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
6117one new output section.
6118
6119If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
6120then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
6121in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
6122linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
6123attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
6124sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
6125support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 6126
a05a5b64
TP
6127The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
6128(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
c005eb9e
AB
6129output sections an orphan is placed in.
6130
252b5132
RH
6131@node Location Counter
6132@subsection The Location Counter
6133@kindex .
6134@cindex dot
6135@cindex location counter
6136@cindex current output location
6137The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
6138current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
6139location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
6140within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
6141anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
6142
6143@cindex holes
6144Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
6145moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
6146location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6147and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6148doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
6149
6150@smallexample
6151SECTIONS
6152@{
6153 output :
6154 @{
6155 file1(.text)
6156 . = . + 1000;
6157 file2(.text)
6158 . += 1000;
6159 file3(.text)
563e308f 6160 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
6161@}
6162@end smallexample
6163@noindent
6164In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6165located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6166followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6167@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 6168@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
6169specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6170
5c6bbab8
NC
6171@cindex dot inside sections
6172Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6173current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 6174statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
6175absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6176however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6177not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6178
6179@smallexample
6180SECTIONS
6181@{
6182 . = 0x100
6183 .text: @{
6184 *(.text)
6185 . = 0x200
6186 @}
6187 . = 0x500
6188 .data: @{
6189 *(.data)
6190 . += 0x600
6191 @}
6192@}
6193@end smallexample
6194
6195The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6196and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6197the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6198much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6199move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6200and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6201the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6202the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6203
b5666f2f
AM
6204@cindex dot outside sections
6205Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6206output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6207needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6208
6209@smallexample
6210SECTIONS
6211@{
6212 start_of_text = . ;
6213 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6214 end_of_text = . ;
6215
6216 start_of_data = . ;
6217 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6218 end_of_data = . ;
6219@}
6220@end smallexample
6221
6222If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6223not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6224between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6225should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6226blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6227the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6228sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6229statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6230special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6231place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6232as follows:
6233
6234@smallexample
6235SECTIONS
6236@{
6237 start_of_text = . ;
6238 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6239 end_of_text = . ;
6240
6241 start_of_data = . ;
6242 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6243 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6244 end_of_data = . ;
6245@}
6246@end smallexample
6247
6248This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6249@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6250placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6251assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6252a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6253section. So you could write:
6254
6255@smallexample
6256SECTIONS
6257@{
6258 start_of_text = . ;
6259 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6260 end_of_text = . ;
6261
6262 . = . ;
6263 start_of_data = . ;
6264 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6265 end_of_data = . ;
6266@}
6267@end smallexample
6268
6269Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6270@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6271
252b5132
RH
6272@need 2000
6273@node Operators
6274@subsection Operators
6275@cindex operators for arithmetic
6276@cindex arithmetic operators
6277@cindex precedence in expressions
6278The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6279the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6280@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6281@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6282@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6283@smallexample
6284precedence associativity Operators Notes
6285(highest)
62861 left ! - ~ (1)
62872 left * / %
62883 left + -
62894 left >> <<
62905 left == != > < <= >=
62916 left &
62927 left |
62938 left &&
62949 left ||
629510 right ? :
629611 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6297(lowest)
6298@end smallexample
6299Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6300(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6301(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6302@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6303@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6304@tex
6305\vskip \baselineskip
6306%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6307\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6308\hrule
6309\halign
6310{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6311height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6312&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6313height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6314\noalign{\hrule}
6315height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6316&highest&&&&&\cr
6317% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6318&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6319&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6320&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6321&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6322&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6323&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6324&7&&left&&|&\cr
6325&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6326&9&&left&&||&\cr
6327&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6328&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6329&lowest&&&&&\cr
6330height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6331\hrule}
6332@end tex
6333@iftex
6334{
6335@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6336@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6337@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6338}
6339@end iftex
6340@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6341
6342@node Evaluation
6343@subsection Evaluation
6344@cindex lazy evaluation
6345@cindex expression evaluation order
6346The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6347an expression when absolutely necessary.
6348
6349The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6350address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6351regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6352as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6353
6354However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6355until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6356other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6357for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6358
6359The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6360assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6361allocation.
6362
6363Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6364@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6365
6366If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6367available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6368following
6369@smallexample
6370@group
6371SECTIONS
6372 @{
a1ab1d2a 6373 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6374 @{ *(.text) @}
6375 @}
6376@end group
6377@end smallexample
6378@noindent
6379will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6380address}.
6381
6382@node Expression Section
6383@subsection The Section of an Expression
6384@cindex expression sections
6385@cindex absolute expressions
6386@cindex relative expressions
6387@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6388@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6389@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6390Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6391relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6392using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6393value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6394symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6395operations.
6396
abf4be64
AM
6397Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6398section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6399address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6400@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6401functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6402One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6403(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6404differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6405versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6406section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6407Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6408absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6409given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6410everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6411
6412In the following simple example,
252b5132 6413
7542af2a
AM
6414@smallexample
6415@group
6416SECTIONS
6417 @{
6418 . = 0x100;
6419 __executable_start = 0x100;
6420 .data :
6421 @{
6422 . = 0x10;
6423 __data_start = 0x10;
6424 *(.data)
6425 @}
6426 @dots{}
6427 @}
6428@end group
6429@end smallexample
252b5132 6430
7542af2a
AM
6431both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6432address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6433@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6434section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6435
5c3049d2
AM
6436For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6437addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6438
6439@itemize @bullet
6440@item
c05f749e
AM
6441Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6442operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6443absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6444@item
7542af2a
AM
6445Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6446relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6447and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6448@item
c05f749e
AM
6449Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6450in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6451address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6452before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6453@end itemize
6454
6455The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6456
6457@itemize @bullet
6458@item
6459An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6460@item
6461The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6462@item
9bc8bb33 6463The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6464relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6465(after above conversions) is also a number when
6466@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6467but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6468@item
6469The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6470relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6471section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6472@item
6473The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6474conversions) is an absolute address.
6475@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6476
6477You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6478to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6479create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6480section @samp{.data}:
6481@smallexample
6482SECTIONS
6483 @{
6484 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6485 @}
6486@end smallexample
6487@noindent
6488If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6489@samp{.data} section.
6490
7542af2a
AM
6491Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6492particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6493
252b5132
RH
6494@node Builtin Functions
6495@subsection Builtin Functions
6496@cindex functions in expressions
6497The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6498use in linker script expressions.
6499
6500@table @code
6501@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6502@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6503@cindex expression, absolute
6504Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6505of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6506value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6507normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6508
6509@item ADDR(@var{section})
6510@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6511@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6512Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6513script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6514the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6515@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6516@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6517the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6518@smallexample
6519@group
6520SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6521 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6522 @{
252b5132
RH
6523 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6524 @dots{}
6525 @}
6526 .output :
6527 @{
6528 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6529 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6530 @}
6531@dots{} @}
6532@end group
6533@end smallexample
6534
876f4090
NS
6535@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6536@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6537@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6538@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6539@cindex round up location counter
6540@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6541@cindex round up expression
6542@cindex align expression
6543Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6544to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6545doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6546arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6547expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6548equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6549
6550Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6551next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6552variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6553input sections:
252b5132
RH
6554@smallexample
6555@group
6556SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6557 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6558 *(.data)
6559 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6560 @}
6561@dots{} @}
6562@end group
6563@end smallexample
6564@noindent
6565The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6566a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6567a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6568of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6569
6570The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6571
362c1d1a
NS
6572@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6573@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6574@cindex section alignment
6575Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6576been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6577evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6578the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6579value in that section.
6580@smallexample
6581@group
6582SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6583 .output @{
6584 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6585 @dots{}
6586 @}
6587@dots{} @}
6588@end group
6589@end smallexample
6590
252b5132
RH
6591@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6592@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6593This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6594scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6595section.
6596
2d20f7bf
JJ
6597@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6598@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6599This is equivalent to either
6600@smallexample
6601(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6602@end smallexample
6603or
6604@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6605(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6606 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6607@end smallexample
6608@noindent
6609depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6610for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6611@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6612If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6613memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6614bytes in the on-disk file.
6615
6616This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6617any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6618@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6619be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6620running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6621that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6622page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6623
6624@noindent
6625Example:
6626@smallexample
6627 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6628@end smallexample
6629
6630@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6631@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6632This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6633evaluation purposes.
6634
6635@smallexample
6636 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6637@end smallexample
6638
a4f5ad88
JJ
6639@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6640@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6641This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6642@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6643When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6644does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6645@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6646argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6647script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6648@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6649padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6650section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6651
6652@smallexample
6653 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6654@end smallexample
6655
252b5132
RH
6656@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6657@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6658@cindex symbol defaults
6659Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6660defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6661return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6662default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6663shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6664the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6665existed, its value is preserved:
6666
6667@smallexample
6668@group
6669SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6670 .text : @{
6671 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6672 @dots{}
6673 @}
6674 @dots{}
6675@}
6676@end group
6677@end smallexample
6678
3ec57632
NC
6679@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6680@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6681Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6682
252b5132
RH
6683@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6684@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6685@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6686Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6687Section LMA}).
6688
2e53f7d6
NC
6689@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6690@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6691Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6692@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6693
252b5132
RH
6694@kindex MAX
6695@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6696Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6697
6698@kindex MIN
6699@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6700Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6701
6702@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6703@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6704@cindex unallocated address, next
6705Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6706This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6707use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6708output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6709
3ec57632
NC
6710@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6711@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6712Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6713
ba916c8a
MM
6714@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6715@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6716Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6717value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6718@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6719will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6720can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6721``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6722name.
6723
252b5132
RH
6724@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6725@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6726@cindex section size
6727Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6728been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6729evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6730@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6731@smallexample
6732@group
6733SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6734 .output @{
6735 .start = . ;
6736 @dots{}
6737 .end = . ;
6738 @}
6739 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6740 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6741@dots{} @}
6742@end group
6743@end smallexample
6744
6745@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6746@itemx sizeof_headers
6747@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6748@cindex header size
6749Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6750information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6751this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6752choose, to facilitate paging.
6753
6754@cindex not enough room for program headers
6755@cindex program headers, not enough room
6756When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6757@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6758number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6759addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6760additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6761room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6762the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6763script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6764you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6765command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6766@end table
6767
6768@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6769@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6770@cindex implicit linker scripts
6771If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6772an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6773linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6774linker will report an error.
6775
6776An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6777
6778Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6779assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6780commands.
6781
6782Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6783at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6784read. This can affect archive searching.
6785
6786@ifset GENERIC
6787@node Machine Dependent
6788@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6789
6790@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6791@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6792sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6793functionality are not listed.
6794
6795@menu
36f63dca
NC
6796@ifset H8300
6797* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6798@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6799@ifset M68HC11
6800* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6801@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6802@ifset ARM
6803* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6804@end ifset
6805@ifset HPPA
6806* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6807@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6808@ifset M68K
6809* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6810@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6811@ifset MIPS
6812* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6813@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6814@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6815* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6816@end ifset
2469cfa2 6817@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6818* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6819@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6820@ifset NDS32
6821* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6822@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6823@ifset NIOSII
6824* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6825@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6826@ifset POWERPC
6827* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6828@end ifset
6829@ifset POWERPC64
6830* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6831@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6832@ifset S/390
6833* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6834@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6835@ifset SPU
6836* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6837@end ifset
74459f0e 6838@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6839* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6840@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6841@ifset WIN32
6842* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6843@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6844@ifset XTENSA
6845* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6846@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6847@end menu
6848@end ifset
6849
252b5132
RH
6850@ifset H8300
6851@ifclear GENERIC
6852@raisesections
6853@end ifclear
6854
6855@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6856@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6857
6858@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6859For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6860you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6861
6862@table @emph
6863@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6864@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6865@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6866targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6867program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6868respectively.
6869
6870@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6871@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6872@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6873@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6874sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6875page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6876(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6877@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6878top page of memory).
1502569c 6879
81f5558e
NC
6880@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6881indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6882displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6883the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6884@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6885whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6886range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6887
1502569c 6888@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6889@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6890biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6891which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6892page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6893(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6894@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6895the top page of memory).
6896
6897@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6898@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
689932 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6900changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6901(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6902@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6903the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6904@end table
6905
6906@ifclear GENERIC
6907@lowersections
6908@end ifclear
6909@end ifset
6910
36f63dca 6911@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6912@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6913@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6914@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6915@node Renesas
6916@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6917
c2dcd04e
NC
6918@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6919H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6920options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6921@end ifset
6922@end ifclear
6923
36f63dca
NC
6924@ifset ARM
6925@ifclear GENERIC
6926@raisesections
6927@end ifclear
6928
93fd0973
SC
6929@ifset M68HC11
6930@ifclear GENERIC
6931@raisesections
6932@end ifclear
6933
6934@node M68HC11/68HC12
6935@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6936
6937@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6938
6939@subsection Linker Relaxation
6940
6941For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6942optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6943
6944@table @emph
6945@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6946@item relaxing address modes
6947@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6948targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6949program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6950respectively.
6951
6952@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6953transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6954page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6955
6956@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6957When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6958of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6959addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6960@code{bset} instructions.
6961
6962@end table
6963
6964@subsection Trampoline Generation
6965
6966@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6967@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6968For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6969call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6970will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6971trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6972case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6973point to the function trampoline.
6974
6975@ifclear GENERIC
6976@lowersections
6977@end ifclear
6978@end ifset
6979
36f63dca 6980@node ARM
3674e28a 6981@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6982
6983@cindex ARM interworking support
6984@kindex --support-old-code
6985For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6986between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6987been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6988line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6989libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
a05a5b64 6990option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
36f63dca
NC
6991given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6992which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6993the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6994non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6995
6996@cindex thumb entry point
6997@cindex entry point, thumb
6998@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6999The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
7000@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
7001But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
7002branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
7003executing in Thumb mode straight away.
7004
ce11ba6c
KT
7005@cindex PE import table prefixing
7006@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
7007The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
7008the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 7009element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
7010import tables. By default this option is turned off.
7011
e489d0ae
PB
7012@cindex BE8
7013@kindex --be8
7014The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
7015executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
7016objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
7017option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
7018little-endian code.
e489d0ae 7019
3674e28a
PB
7020@cindex TARGET1
7021@kindex --target1-rel
7022@kindex --target1-abs
7023The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
7024@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
7025or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
7026and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
7027
7028@cindex TARGET2
7029@kindex --target2=@var{type}
7030The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
7031@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
7032meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
7033@table @samp
7034@item rel
eeac373a
PB
7035@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
7036@item abs
7037@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
7038@item got-rel
7039@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
7040@end table
7041
319850b4
JB
7042@cindex FIX_V4BX
7043@kindex --fix-v4bx
7044The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
7045specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
7046interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
7047also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
7048
7049In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
7050linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
7051@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
7052
7053In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
7054relocations are ignored.
7055
845b51d6
PB
7056@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
7057@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
7058Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
7059relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
7060
7061@smallexample
7062TST rM, #1
7063MOVEQ PC, rM
7064BX Rn
7065@end smallexample
7066
7067This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
7068and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 7069condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 7070
33bfe774
JB
7071@cindex USE_BLX
7072@kindex --use-blx
7073The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
7074BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
7075situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
7076code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
7077each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
7078
7079This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
7080specify it if you are using that target.
7081
c6dd86c6
JB
7082@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
7083@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
7084The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
7085bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
7086instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
7087to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
7088the support code can read the intended values.
7089
7090The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
7091intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
7092and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
7093intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
7094full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
7095you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
7096
7097If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
7098enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
7099@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
7100mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
7101vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
7102@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
7103
7104If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7105potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7106such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
7107first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
7108instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
7109the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
7110are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
7111
2de70689
MGD
7112@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
7113@kindex --fix-arm1176
7114@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
7115The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
7116in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
7117are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
7118unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
7119
9d5777a3 7120Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 7121Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
7122http://infocenter.arm.com/.
7123
a504d23a
LA
7124@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
7125@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
7126
7127The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
7128workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
7129the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
7130off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
7131the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
7132core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
7133integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
7134VPOP. Stores are not affected.
7135
7136The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
7137necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
7138
7139The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
7140@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
7141STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
7142linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
7143@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
7144
7145If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7146potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7147such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7148replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7149branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7150then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7151
7152The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7153the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7154
7155The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7156they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7157there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7158occurs.
7159
7160The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7161PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7162large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7163cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7164occurs.
7165
bf21ed78
MS
7166@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7167@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 7168The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
7169warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7170enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7171linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7172using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7173not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
7174
7175@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7176@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7177The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7178warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7179@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7180linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7181using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 7182
726150b7
NC
7183@cindex PIC_VENEER
7184@kindex --pic-veneer
7185The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7186ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7187is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7188@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7189
7190@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7191@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7192The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7193code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7194perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7195placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
a05a5b64 7196controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
726150b7 7197The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 7198duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
7199group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7200code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7201where they should be placed.
7202
7203The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7204@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 7205placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
7206branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7207placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7208value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7209exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7210A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7211linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7212from the input sections.
7213
7214The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7215@samp{N = +1}.
7216
1a51c1a4
NC
7217Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7218only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7219otherwise.
7220
1db37fe6
YG
7221@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7222@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7223@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7224The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7225
7226The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7227
68fcca92
JW
7228@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7229@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7230@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7231The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7232
7233Please contact ARM for further details.
7234
1db37fe6
YG
7235@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7236@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7237@cindex Merging exidx entries
7238The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7239
7240@kindex --long-plt
7241@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7242The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7243which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7244entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7245
1f56df9d
JW
7246@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7247@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7248The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7249link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7250
4ba2ef8f
TP
7251@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7252All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
a05a5b64 7253Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
4ba2ef8f
TP
7254@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7255veneers in memory.
7256
54ddd295
TP
7257@kindex --cmse-implib
7258@cindex Secure gateway import library
7259The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7260specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7261secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7262executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7263
0955507f
TP
7264@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7265@cindex Input import library
7266The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7267must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7268given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7269in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7270@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7271library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7272library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7273for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7274specified.
7275
36f63dca
NC
7276@ifclear GENERIC
7277@lowersections
7278@end ifclear
7279@end ifset
7280
7281@ifset HPPA
7282@ifclear GENERIC
7283@raisesections
7284@end ifclear
7285
7286@node HPPA ELF32
7287@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7288@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7289@kindex --multi-subspace
7290When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7291import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7292The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7293stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7294multiple sub-spaces.
7295
7296@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7297@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7298Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7299stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7300@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7301sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7302a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7303the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7304conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7305prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7306A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7307branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7308@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7309@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7310detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7311positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7312
7313Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7314single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7315create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7316large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7317
7318@ifclear GENERIC
7319@lowersections
7320@end ifclear
7321@end ifset
7322
7fb9f789
NC
7323@ifset M68K
7324@ifclear GENERIC
7325@raisesections
7326@end ifclear
7327
7328@node M68K
7329@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7330
7331@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7332@kindex --got=@var{type}
7333The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7334The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7335@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7336the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7337@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7338entries only at non-negative offsets.
7339@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7340entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7341support such GOTs.
7342@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7343output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7344file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7345files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7346
7347@ifclear GENERIC
7348@lowersections
7349@end ifclear
7350@end ifset
7351
833794fc
MR
7352@ifset MIPS
7353@ifclear GENERIC
7354@raisesections
7355@end ifclear
7356
7357@node MIPS
7358@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7359
7360@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7361@kindex --insn32
7362@kindex --no-insn32
7363The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7364microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7365in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7366used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7367or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7368including 16-bit ones where possible.
7369
8b10b0b3
MR
7370@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7371@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7372@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7373The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7374control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7375@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7376relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7377calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7378relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7379instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7380or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7381the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7382
833794fc
MR
7383@ifclear GENERIC
7384@lowersections
7385@end ifclear
7386@end ifset
7387
36f63dca
NC
7388@ifset MMIX
7389@ifclear GENERIC
7390@raisesections
7391@end ifclear
7392
7393@node MMIX
7394@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7395For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7396@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7397understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7398can translate between the two formats.
7399
7400There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7401Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7402registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7403equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7404@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7405global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7406this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7407symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7408
7a2de473
HPN
7409Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7410@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7411The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7412of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7413
7414Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7415are left out from an mmo file.
7416
7417@ifclear GENERIC
7418@lowersections
7419@end ifclear
7420@end ifset
7421
7422@ifset MSP430
7423@ifclear GENERIC
7424@raisesections
7425@end ifclear
7426
7427@node MSP430
7428@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7429For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7430will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7431just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7432
7433@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7434The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7435
7436@table @code
7437@item @samp{.vectors}
7438Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7439
7440@item @samp{.bootloader}
7441Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7442in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7443
7444@item @samp{.infomem}
7445Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7446this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7447
c0065db7 7448@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7449This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7450in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7451
7452@item @samp{.noinit}
7453Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7454
c0065db7 7455The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7456@end table
7457
7ef3addb
JL
7458@table @option
7459@cindex MSP430 Options
7460@kindex --code-region
7461@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7462This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7463argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7464using this option.
7465
7466@kindex --data-region
7467@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7468This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7469[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7470for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7471
7472@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7473@item --disable-sec-transformation
7474Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7475and @code{--data-region} options.
7476This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7477wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7478not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7479@end table
7480
36f63dca
NC
7481@ifclear GENERIC
7482@lowersections
7483@end ifclear
7484@end ifset
7485
35c08157
KLC
7486@ifset NDS32
7487@ifclear GENERIC
7488@raisesections
7489@end ifclear
7490
7491@node NDS32
7492@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7493@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7494For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7495relaxes objects according to these options.
7496
7497@table @code
7498@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7499Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7500
7501@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7502Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7503
7504@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7505Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7506
7507@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7508Export the EX9 table after linking.
7509
7510@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7511Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7512
7513@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7514Update the existing EX9 table.
7515
7516@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7517Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7518
7519@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7520Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7521
7522@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7523Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7524
7525@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7526Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7527@end table
7528
7529@ifclear GENERIC
7530@lowersections
7531@end ifclear
7532@end ifset
7533
78058a5e
SL
7534@ifset NIOSII
7535@ifclear GENERIC
7536@raisesections
7537@end ifclear
7538
7539@node Nios II
7540@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7541@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7542@kindex --relax on Nios II
7543
7544Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7545transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7546which may result in @command{ld} giving
7547@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7548The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7549trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7550outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7551trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7552be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7553larger than 256MB.
7554
7555The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7556is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7557@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7558locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7559source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7560register as a temporary.
7561
7562Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7563relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7564option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7565
7566@ifclear GENERIC
7567@lowersections
7568@end ifclear
7569@end ifset
7570
2a60a7a8
AM
7571@ifset POWERPC
7572@ifclear GENERIC
7573@raisesections
7574@end ifclear
7575
7576@node PowerPC ELF32
7577@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7578@cindex PowerPC long branches
7579@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7580Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7581displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7582@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7583@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7584the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7585section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7586section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7587@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7588both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7589considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7590
7591@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7592@table @option
7593@cindex PowerPC PLT
7594@kindex --bss-plt
7595@item --bss-plt
7596Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7597generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7598the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7599writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7600@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7601PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7602compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7603BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7604
016687f8
AM
7605@kindex --secure-plt
7606@item --secure-plt
7607@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7608@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7609when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7610layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7611style BSS PLT.
7612
2a60a7a8
AM
7613@cindex PowerPC GOT
7614@kindex --sdata-got
7615@item --sdata-got
7616The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7617sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7618@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7619section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7620@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7621@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7622@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7623@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7624PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7625pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7626GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7627really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7628
7629@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7630@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7631@item --emit-stub-syms
7632This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7633symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7634
7635@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7636@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7637@item --no-tls-optimize
7638PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7639sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7640disable the optimization.
7641@end table
7642
7643@ifclear GENERIC
7644@lowersections
7645@end ifclear
7646@end ifset
7647
7648@ifset POWERPC64
7649@ifclear GENERIC
7650@raisesections
7651@end ifclear
7652
7653@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7654@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7655
7656@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7657@table @option
7658@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7659@kindex --stub-group-size
7660@item --stub-group-size
7661Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7662by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7663@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7664sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7665a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7666the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7667conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7668prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7669A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7670branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7671@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7672@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7673detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7674positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7675
7676Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7677single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7678create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7679large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7680
7681@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7682@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7683@item --emit-stub-syms
7684This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7685symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7686
7687@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7688@kindex --dotsyms
7689@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7690@item --dotsyms
7691@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7692These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7693in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7694function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7695code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7696properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7697to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7698@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7699dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7700feature.
7701
7ae4ea7d
AM
7702@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7703@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7704@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7705@item --save-restore-funcs
7706@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7707These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7708provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7709@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7710function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7711link.
7712
2a60a7a8
AM
7713@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7714@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7715@item --no-tls-optimize
7716PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7717sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7718disable the optimization.
7719
7c9cf415
AM
7720@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7721@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7722@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
9e7028aa
AM
7723@kindex --tls-get-addr-regsave
7724@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-regsave
95421fb9
AM
7725@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7726@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
9e7028aa 7727These options control how PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7c9cf415
AM
7728stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7729an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7730@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
9e7028aa
AM
7731stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables
7732generation of the stub when glibc advertises the availability of
7733__tls_get_addr_opt.
7734Using @option{--tls-get-addr-optimize} with an older glibc won't do
7735much besides slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking
7736an application against an older glibc with the expectation that it
7737will normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7738@option{--tls-get-addr-regsave} forces generation of a stub that saves
7739and restores volatile registers around the call into glibc. Normally,
7740this is done when the linker detects a call to __tls_get_addr_desc.
7741Such calls then go via the register saving stub to __tls_get_addr_opt.
5cebc931 7742@option{--no-tls-get-addr-regsave} disables generation of the
9e7028aa 7743register saves.
7c9cf415 7744
2a60a7a8
AM
7745@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7746@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7747@item --no-opd-optimize
7748PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7749corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7750the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7751Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7752
7753@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7754@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7755@item --non-overlapping-opd
7756Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7757@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7758the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7759entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7760
7761@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7762@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7763@item --no-toc-optimize
7764PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7765entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7766reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7767marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7768marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7769relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7770unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7771reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7772discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7773reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7774code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7775optimization.
7776
7777@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7778@kindex --no-multi-toc
7779@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7780If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7781@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7782where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7783entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7784total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7785grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7786TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7787calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7788help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
778964K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7790Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7791
7792@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7793@kindex --no-toc-sort
7794@item --no-toc-sort
7795By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7796happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7797placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7798with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7799referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7800@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7801results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7802off this feature.
7803
7804@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7805@kindex --plt-align
7806@kindex --no-plt-align
7807@item --plt-align
7808@itemx --no-plt-align
7809Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7810aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7811boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7812specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7813specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7814if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7815PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7816
7817@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7818@kindex --plt-static-chain
7819@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7820@item --plt-static-chain
7821@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7822Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7823chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7824chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7825
7826@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7827@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7828@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7829@item --plt-thread-safe
1be5d8d3 7830@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
794e51c0
AM
7831With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7832lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7833another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7834order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7835memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7836barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7837looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7838seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7839default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7840
7841@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7842@kindex --plt-localentry
7843@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7844@item --plt-localentry
7845@itemx --no-localentry
7846ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7847ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7848(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7849Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7850or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7851functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7852in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7853interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7854including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7855to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7856complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7857care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7858@end table
7859
7860@ifclear GENERIC
7861@lowersections
7862@end ifclear
7863@end ifset
7864
b4cbbe8f
AK
7865@ifset S/390
7866@ifclear GENERIC
7867@raisesections
7868@end ifclear
7869
7870@node S/390 ELF
7871@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7872
7873@cindex S/390 ELF options
7874@table @option
7875
7876@cindex S/390
7877@kindex --s390-pgste
7878@item --s390-pgste
7879This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7880segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7881binaries marked that way.
7882@end table
7883
7884@ifclear GENERIC
7885@lowersections
7886@end ifclear
7887@end ifset
7888
49fa1e15
AM
7889@ifset SPU
7890@ifclear GENERIC
7891@raisesections
7892@end ifclear
7893
7894@node SPU ELF
7895@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7896
7897@cindex SPU ELF options
7898@table @option
7899
7900@cindex SPU plugins
7901@kindex --plugin
7902@item --plugin
7903This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7904
7905@cindex SPU overlays
7906@kindex --no-overlays
7907@item --no-overlays
7908Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7909regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7910@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7911turns off all this special overlay handling.
7912
7913@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7914@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7915@item --emit-stub-syms
7916This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7917symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7918
7919@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7920@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7921@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7922This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7923function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7924on calls to non-overlay regions.
7925
7926@cindex SPU local store size
7927@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7928@item --local-store=lo:hi
7929@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7930the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7931range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7932
c0065db7 7933@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7934@kindex --stack-analysis
7935@item --stack-analysis
7936SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7937unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7938under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7939@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7940@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7941determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7942for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7943for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7944for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7945find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7946and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7947under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7948dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7949is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7950and calls will be given.
7951
c0065db7 7952@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7953@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7954@item --emit-stack-syms
7955This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7956in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7957These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7958functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7959functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7960such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7961The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7962@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7963@end table
7964
7965@ifclear GENERIC
7966@lowersections
7967@end ifclear
7968@end ifset
7969
36f63dca
NC
7970@ifset TICOFF
7971@ifclear GENERIC
7972@raisesections
7973@end ifclear
7974
7975@node TI COFF
7976@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7977@cindex TI COFF versions
7978@kindex --format=@var{version}
7979The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7980TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7981also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7982format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7983header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7984
7985@ifclear GENERIC
7986@lowersections
7987@end ifclear
7988@end ifset
7989
2ca22b03
NC
7990@ifset WIN32
7991@ifclear GENERIC
7992@raisesections
7993@end ifclear
7994
7995@node WIN32
7996@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7997
c0065db7 7998This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
a05a5b64
TP
7999See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
8000command-line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
8001
8002@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8003@cindex import libraries
8004@item import libraries
69da35b5 8005The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 8006libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
8007regular static archives and are handled as any other static
8008archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03 8009support for creating such libraries provided with the
a05a5b64 8010@samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
2ca22b03 8011
c0065db7
RM
8012@item exporting DLL symbols
8013@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
8014The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
8015
8016@table @emph
8017@item using auto-export functionality
8018@cindex using auto-export functionality
8019By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
a05a5b64 8020which is controlled by the following command-line options:
dc8465bf 8021
0a5d968e
NC
8022@itemize
8023@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
8024@item --exclude-symbols
8025@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 8026@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 8027@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
8028@end itemize
8029
09e2aba4
DK
8030When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
8031(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
8032symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
8033often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
8034private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 8035options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
8036exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
8037final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
8038
8039If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
8040command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
8041if either of the following are true:
8042
8043@itemize
8044@item A DEF file is used.
8045@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
8046@end itemize
dc8465bf 8047
c0065db7
RM
8048@item using a DEF file
8049@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
8050Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
8051an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
8052exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
8053name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 8054command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
8055
8056@example
8057gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
8058@end example
8059
0a5d968e
NC
8060Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
8061@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8062
dc8465bf
NC
8063Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
8064
8065@example
4b5bd4e7 8066LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
8067
8068EXPORTS
8069foo
8070bar
8071_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
8072another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
8073var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
8074doo = foo == foo2
8075eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 8076@end example
dc8465bf 8077
7fcab871 8078This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
8079symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
8080alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
8081by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
8082@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
8083@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
8084export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
8085in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
8086symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 8087
6b31ad16
DS
8088The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
8089name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
8090the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
8091
b45619c0
NC
8092When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
8093library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 8094@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 8095executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
8096
8097With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
8098specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 8099non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
8100
8101If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
8102or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
8103filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 8104
4b5bd4e7
DS
8105The complete specification of an export symbol is:
8106
8107@example
8108EXPORTS
8109 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
8110 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 8111 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 8112@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
8113
8114Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
8115@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
8116@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
8117@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
8118Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
8119@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
8120string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
8121
8122The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
8123
8124@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
8125will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
8126by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
8127linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
8128library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
8129
8130@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
8131The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
8132the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
8133@code{*_imp__foo}).
8134
8135@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
8136well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
8137read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
8138variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
8139the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
8140extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
8141application will behave unexpectedly.
8142
8143@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
8144it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
8145symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 8146API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 8147the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 8148
4b5bd4e7
DS
8149See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
8150other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
8151
8152@cindex creating a DEF file
8153While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
a05a5b64 8154with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
0a5d968e
NC
8155
8156@item Using decorations
8157@cindex Using decorations
8158Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8159itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8160declared as:
8161
8162@example
8163__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8164__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8165@end example
8166
8167All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8168any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8169this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8170the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8171
8172Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 8173decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
8174instead:
8175
8176@example
8177__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8178__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8179@end example
8180
c0065db7
RM
8181This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8182when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
8183variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8184code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 8185of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
8186omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8187@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 8188information.
c0065db7 8189@end table
dc8465bf 8190
2ca22b03
NC
8191@cindex automatic data imports
8192@item automatic data imports
8193The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 8194by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 8195compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 8196issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 8197code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 8198c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 8199initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 8200decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 8201platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
8202command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8203The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8204suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8205trigger the feature's use.
8206
c0065db7 8207auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
8208additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8209
c0065db7 8210"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
8211documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8212
c0065db7
RM
8213The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8214occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8215One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
8216below.
8217
8218@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
8219For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8220object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8221offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8222field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8223in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 8224without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 8225The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
8226references.
8227
c0065db7
RM
8228The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8229be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8230themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8231runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8232compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8233support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
8234run without error on an older system.
8235
c0065db7
RM
8236@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8237enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
8238
8239@cindex direct linking to a dll
8240@item direct linking to a dll
8241The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8242including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 8243libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 8244traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
8245libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8246function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8247though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 8248storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 8249tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
8250large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8251
c0065db7 8252Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 8253@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 8254of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8255perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8256select the dll instead of an import library.
8257
2ca22b03 8258
69da35b5
NC
8259For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8260to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8261
8262@example
45e948fe
NC
8263libxxx.dll.a
8264xxx.dll.a
8265libxxx.a
8266xxx.lib
f6c4d4b1 8267libxxx.lib
69da35b5 8268cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8269libxxx.dll
8270xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8271@end example
8272
69da35b5
NC
8273before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8274
c0065db7
RM
8275(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8276where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8277@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8278file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8279@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8280
c0065db7
RM
8281Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8282@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8283was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8284various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8285could coexist on the same machine.
8286
2ca22b03
NC
8287The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8288applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8289libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8290
8291@example
8292bin/
8293 cygxxx.dll
8294lib/
8295 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8296 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8297@end example
8298
c0065db7
RM
8299Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8300done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8301
83021. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8303@example
8304gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8305@end example
2ca22b03 8306
69da35b5
NC
8307However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8308(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8309@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8310not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8311
2ca22b03
NC
83122. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8313directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8314should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8315making the app/dll.
8316
8317@example
8318ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8319@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8320
8321Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8322
8323@example
8324gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8325@end example
69da35b5
NC
8326
8327This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8328perfectly legal
8329
8330@example
8331bin/
8332 cygxxx-5.dll
8333lib/
c0065db7 8334 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8335@end example
8336
dc8465bf 8337Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8338even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8339@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8340
8341Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8342wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8343
83441. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8345work with auto-imported data.
8346
dc8465bf
NC
83472. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8348import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8349symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8350for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8351possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8352
45e948fe
NC
83533. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8354critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8355in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8356stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8357
69da35b5 8358So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8359true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8360a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8361binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8362massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8363requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8364will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8365
c0065db7 8366@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8367@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8368@item adding additional names
8369Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8370A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8371exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8372when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8373import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8374
c0065db7 8375@example
dc8465bf
NC
8376LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8377
8378EXPORTS
c0065db7 8379foo
dc8465bf 8380_foo = foo
c0065db7 8381@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8382
8383The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8384
8385Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8386source code using the "weak" attribute:
8387
c0065db7
RM
8388@example
8389void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8390void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8391@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8392
8393See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8394symbols.
8395
8396@item renaming symbols
8397Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8398kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8399@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8400DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8401created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8402
c0065db7 8403@example
dc8465bf
NC
8404LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8405
8406EXPORTS
8407_foo = foo
c0065db7 8408@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8409
8410The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8411@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8412@end table
dc8465bf 8413
0a5d968e 8414Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
a05a5b64 8415unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
0a5d968e 8416If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8417@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8418that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8419@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8420renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8421to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8422the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8423In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8424which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8425
8426@cindex weak externals
8427@item weak externals
8428The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8429weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8430defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8431are three variants of weak externals:
8432@itemize
8433@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8434called lazy externals.
8435@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8436This form is not presently implemented.
8437@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8438implemented.
8439@end itemize
8440As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8441are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8442uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8443
8444@cindex aligned common symbols
8445@item aligned common symbols
8446As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8447desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8448the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8449carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8450by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8451tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8452but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8453warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8454
2ca22b03
NC
8455@end table
8456
8457@ifclear GENERIC
8458@lowersections
8459@end ifclear
8460@end ifset
8461
e0001a05
NC
8462@ifset XTENSA
8463@ifclear GENERIC
8464@raisesections
8465@end ifclear
8466
8467@node Xtensa
8468@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8469
8470@cindex Xtensa processors
8471The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8472@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8473specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8474keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8475example, with the command:
8476
8477@smallexample
8478SECTIONS
8479@{
8480 .text : @{
8481 *(.literal .text)
8482 @}
8483@}
8484@end smallexample
8485
8486@noindent
8487@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8488and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8489literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8490interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8491group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8492files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8493and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8494
43cd72b9 8495@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8496@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8497Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8498provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8499is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8500literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8501will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8502location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8503the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8504unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8505@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8506range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8507
8508For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8509to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8510instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8511instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8512instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8513@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8514hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8515By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8516switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8517density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8518instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8519performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8520linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8521a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8522
8523The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8524control the linker:
8525
8526@cindex Xtensa options
8527@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8528@item --size-opt
8529When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8530more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8531no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8532alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8533preserve the correctness of the code.
8534@end table
e0001a05
NC
8535
8536@ifclear GENERIC
8537@lowersections
8538@end ifclear
8539@end ifset
8540
252b5132
RH
8541@ifclear SingleFormat
8542@node BFD
8543@chapter BFD
8544
8545@cindex back end
8546@cindex object file management
8547@cindex object formats available
8548@kindex objdump -i
8549The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8550These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8551object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8552format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8553it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8554associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8555object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8556(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8557list all the formats available for your configuration.
8558
8559@cindex BFD requirements
8560@cindex requirements for BFD
8561As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8562several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8563BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8564formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8565been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8566BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8567may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8568
8569One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8570mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8571useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8572conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8573
8574@menu
8575* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8576@end menu
8577
8578@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8579@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8580@cindex opening object files
8581@include bfdsumm.texi
8582@end ifclear
8583
8584@node Reporting Bugs
8585@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8586@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8587@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8588
ff5dcc92 8589Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8590
8591Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8592it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8593to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8594work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8595@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8596
8597In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8598information that enables us to fix the bug.
8599
8600@menu
8601* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8602* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8603@end menu
8604
8605@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8606@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8607@cindex bug criteria
8608
8609If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8610
8611@itemize @bullet
8612@cindex fatal signal
8613@cindex linker crash
8614@cindex crash of linker
8615@item
8616If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8617@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8618
8619@cindex error on valid input
8620@item
ff5dcc92 8621If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8622
8623@cindex invalid input
8624@item
ff5dcc92 8625If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8626may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8627object files are correct.
8628
8629@item
8630If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8631improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8632@end itemize
8633
8634@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8635@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8636@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8637@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8638
8639A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8640products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8641recommend you contact that organization first.
8642
8643You can find contact information for many support companies and
8644individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8645distribution.
8646
ad22bfe8 8647@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8648Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8649@value{BUGURL}.
8650@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8651
8652The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8653@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8654fact or leave it out, state it!
8655
8656Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8657problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8658assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8659matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8660the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8661location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8662were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8663into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8664specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8665and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8666
8667Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8668the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8669on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8670
8671Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8672bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8673respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8674You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8675
8676To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8677
8678@itemize @bullet
8679@item
ff5dcc92 8680The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8681the @samp{--version} argument.
8682
8683Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8684the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8685
8686@item
ff5dcc92 8687Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8688patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8689
8690@item
8691The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8692version number.
8693
8694@item
ff5dcc92 8695What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8696``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8697
8698@item
8699The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8700observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8701list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8702sufficient.
8703
8704If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8705and then we might not encounter the bug.
8706
8707@item
8708A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8709bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8710provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8711bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8712state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8713requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8714we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8715attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8716
8717If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8718@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8719object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8720@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8721how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8722
8723@item
8724A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8725incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8726
ff5dcc92 8727Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8728will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8729not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8730a chance to make a mistake.
8731
8732Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8733say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8734copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8735C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8736and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8737fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8738you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8739any conclusion from our observations.
8740
8741@item
ff5dcc92 8742If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8743diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8744@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8745If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8746context, not by line number.
8747
8748The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8749sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8750@end itemize
8751
8752Here are some things that are not necessary:
8753
8754@itemize @bullet
8755@item
8756A description of the envelope of the bug.
8757
8758Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8759which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8760changes will not affect it.
8761
8762This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8763will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8764with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8765We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8766
8767Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8768of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8769output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8770less time, and so on.
8771
8772However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8773report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8774
8775@item
8776A patch for the bug.
8777
8778A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8779the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8780a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8781to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8782
ff5dcc92 8783Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8784construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8785through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8786able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8787fixed.
8788
8789And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8790patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8791help us to understand.
8792
8793@item
8794A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8795
8796Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8797things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8798@end itemize
8799
8800@node MRI
8801@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8802@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8803To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8804linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8805alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8806described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8807simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8808@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8809linker commands; these commands are described here.
8810
8811In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8812file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8813features to make use of them.
8814
8815You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8816@samp{-c} command-line option.
8817
8818Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8819command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8820blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8821MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8822issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8823
8824Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8825
8826You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8827lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8828The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8829
8830@table @code
8831@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8832@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8833@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8834Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8835the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8836@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8837your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8838script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8839commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8840input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8841@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8842
8843@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8844@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8845Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8846in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8847
8848@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8849
8850@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8851@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8852Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8853@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8854
8855@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8856@item BASE @var{expression}
8857Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8858absolute addresses) in the output file.
8859
8860@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8861@item CHIP @var{expression}
8862@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8863This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8864
8865@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8866@item END
8867This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8868
8869@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8870@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8871Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
dc12032b 8872language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
252b5132
RH
8873
8874@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8875@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8876Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8877@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8878
8879The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8880same line, with no change in its effect.
8881
8882@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8883@item LOAD @var{filename}
8884@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8885Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8886same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8887command line.
8888
8889@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8890@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8891@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8892MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8893option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8894
8895@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8896@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8897@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8898Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8899order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8900script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8901sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8902file, in the order specified.
8903
8904@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8905@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8906@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8907@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8908Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8909@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8910
8911@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8912@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8913@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8914@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8915You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8916specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8917If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8918@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8919@end table
8920
793c5807
NC
8921@node GNU Free Documentation License
8922@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8923@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8924
370b66a1
CD
8925@node LD Index
8926@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8927
8928@printindex cp
8929
8930@tex
7ca01ed9 8931% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8932% meantime:
8933\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8934\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8935\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8936\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8937\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8938\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8939\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8940\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8941\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8942% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8943@end tex
8944
252b5132 8945@bye
This page took 2.165126 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.